ICP320 SAP Apparel and Footwear / Material Managament and Production Planning

ICP320

SAP Apparel and Footwear Material Managament and Production Planning

THE BEST-RUN BUSINESSES RUN SAP
© SAP AG 2007

© SAP AG 2008

ICP320 SAP Apparel and Footwear Material Managament and Production Planning Version 64 Material Number: 50088050

Copyright

Copyright 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG. The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice.

© SAP AG 2006

Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors. Microsoft, Windows, Excel, Outlook, and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. IBM, DB2, DB2 Universal Database, OS/2, Parallel Sysplex, MVS/ESA, AIX, S/390, AS/400, OS/390, OS/400, iSeries, pSeries, xSeries, zSeries, System i, System i5, System p, System p5, System x, System z, System z9, z/OS, AFP, Intelligent Miner, WebSphere, Netfinity, Tivoli, Informix, i5/OS, POWER, POWER5, POWER5+, OpenPower and PowerPC are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM Corporation. Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, PostScript, and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation. UNIX, X/Open, OSF/1, and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open Group. Citrix, ICA, Program Neighborhood, MetaFrame, WinFrame, VideoFrame, and MultiWin are trademarks or registered trademarks of Citrix Systems, Inc. HTML, XML, XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3C®, World Wide Web Consortium, Massachusetts Institute of Technology. Java is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc. JavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc., used under license for technology invented and implemented by Netscape. MaxDB is a trademark of MySQL AB, Sweden. SAP, R/3, mySAP, mySAP.com, xApps, xApp, SAP NetWeaver, and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks

of SAP AG in Germany and in several other countries all over the world. All other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies. Data contained in this document serves informational purposes only. National product specifications may vary. The information in this document is proprietary to SAP. No part of this document may be reproduced, copied, or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express prior written permission of SAP AG. This document is a preliminary version and not subject to your license agreement or any other agreement with SAP. This document contains only intended strategies, developments, and functionalities of the SAP® product and is not intended to be binding upon SAP to any particular course of business, product strategy, and/or development. Please note that this document is subject to change and may be changed by SAP at any time without notice. SAP assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions in this document. SAP does not warrant the accuracy or completeness of the information, text, graphics, links, or other items contained within this material. This document is provided without a warranty of any kind, either express or implied, including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose, or non-infringement. SAP shall have no liability for damages of any kind including without limitation direct, special, indirect, or consequential damages that may result from the use of these materials. This limitation shall not apply in cases of intent or gross negligence. The statutory liability for personal injury and defective products is not affected. SAP has no control over the information that you may access through the use of hot links contained in these materials and does not endorse your use of third-party Web pages nor provide any warranty whatsoever relating to third-party Web pages.

Curriculum/Course Prerequisites

SCM600 Processes in Sales & Distribution

5 Days

ICP310

5 Days

SAP Apparel and Footwear Sales & Distribution and Allocation Run

SAP01 SAP Overview

3 Days

ICP320 SCM500 5 Days Processes in Procurement

5 Days

SAP Apparel and Footwear Materials Management and Production Planning

SCM300

3 Days

Overview Manufacturing

© SAP AG 2008

Target Audience
This course is intended for the following audiences:
Members of the Apparel and Footwear (AFS) implementation team with experience in purchasing, production planning and IT, who are responsible for setting up the demand management during the implementation process of SAP´s Apparel and Footwear Solution. Duration: 5 day

© SAP AG 2008

User notes These training materials are not a teach-yourself program. They complement the explanations provided by your course instructor. Space is provided on each page for you to note down additional information. There may not be sufficient time during the course to complete all the exercises. The exercises provide additional examples that are covered during the course. You can also work through these examples in your own time to increase your understanding of the topics.

Course Overview: Course Content

Preface Unit 1 Unit 2 Unit 3 Unit 4 Unit 5 Unit 6 Unit 7 Unit 8 Unit 9 Unit 10 Course Overview Master Data Procurement Inventory Management Invoice Verification Special Business Processes Product Forecasting Planning MRP Production Conclusion Appendices

© SAP AG 2008

© SAP AG

ICP320

1-1

Course Goals

This course will prepare you to:
Work with the strategies for managing the unique requirements of apparel and footwear supply management using SAP AFS

© SAP AG 2008

© SAP AG

ICP320

1-2

you will be able to: Identify how AFS supports standards and business practices in the apparel and footwear industry Outline how AFS functionality integrates the supply chain for the apparel and footwear industry Define and create multi-dimensional product grids and include them in the material master Explain the relationship between requirement and stock categories within a coverage strategy Outline the procurement process in AFS © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 1-3 .Course Objectives (1) After completing this course.

you will be able to: Outline inventory management procedures Describe AFS special business processes and stocks Describe product forecasting and planned independent requirements for AFS Outline Materials Requirements Planning (MRP) procedures and execute AFS MRP for purchased and produced material © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 1-4 .Course Objectives (2) After completing this course.

Course Objectives (3) After completing this course. you will be able to: Evaluate MRP results in AFS Create PP master data for AFS materials Create and release a production order in AFS Explain the ATP check in AFS production orders Analyze different information systems/reports in production © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 1-5 .

Course Content Preface Unit 1 Unit 2 Unit 3 Unit 4 Unit 5 Course Overview Master Data Procurement Inventory Management Invoice Verification Unit 7 Unit 8 Unit 9 Unit 6 Special Business Processes Product Forecasting Planning MRP Production Conclusion Appendices © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 1-6 .

Course Overview Diagram AFS Master Data Material Grids Categories Material Master Customer Master Vendor Master Bill of Materials Pricing Value Added Services Seasons Sales and Distribution Sales MRP Procurement Allocation Run Delivery Billing Sales Information System Procurement Purchase Source Purchase Requisition Allocation Order Warehouse Management Production SOP MRP Markers Valuation/ Production Production Product Order Lots Costing Goods Receipt Routing Planned Order Invoice Verification AFS specific functionality ERP Standard functionality with AFS enhancements © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 1-7 .

Main Business Scenario You are a member of the implementation team responsible for setting up supply management at your company. © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 1-8 .

AFS Master Data: Course Content Preface Unit 1 Unit 2 Unit 3 Unit 4 Unit 5 Unit 6 Unit 7 Unit 8 Unit 9 Unit 10 Course Overview Master Data Procurement Inventory Management Invoice Verification Special Business Processes Product Forecasting Planning MRP Production Conclusion Appendices © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 2-1 .

AFS Master Data Contents: Master and Application Grids + Relevance Grid Control Data Categories and Coverage Strategy +Relevance Material Master Seasonality in MM/PP Bill of Material (BOM): BOM types in AFS © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 2-2 .

you will be able to: Define material grids Define relevance Explain the relationship between the material grid and the material master Explain how grid dimensions are determined and maintained Create a multi-dimensional master grid Describe a purchase grid / sales grid Explain the function of Grid Control Data Report on the grid history © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 2-3 .AFS Master Data: Unit Objectives (1) After completing this unit.

AFS Master Data: Unit Objectives (2) After completing this unit. you will be able to: Explain the relationship between requirement and stock categories within a coverage strategy Create a coverage strategy and maintain the relationship between stock and requirement categories Set up categories in Customizing Define Relevance © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 2-4 .

you will be able to: Create and maintain a material master for AFS material Include master grid in the material master Set up fabric content codes Explain the usage of seasonality in MM/PP List the different BOM types Create an AFS BOM Apply quantity distribution profiles in a BOM © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 2-5 .AFS Master Data: Unit Objectives (3) After completing this unit.

AFS Master Data: Course Overview Diagram AFS Master Data Material Grids Categories Material Master Customer Master Vendor Master Bill of Materials Pricing Value Added Services Seasons Sales and Distribution Sales MRP Procurement Allocation Run Delivery Billing Sales Information System Procurement Purchase Source Purchase Requisition Allocation Order Warehouse Management Production SOP MRP Markers Valuation/ Production Production Product Order Lots Costing Goods Receipt Routing Planned Order Invoice Verification AFS specific functionality ERP Standard functionality with AFS enhancements © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 2-6 .

For example. L. we can also have a category (MLABEL) which could be second quality or rejects. © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 2-7 . one for a manufacturer’s label (MLABEL). XL and various colors (two dimensions) Jeans are available in various sizes (inseam.S. we want to produce two categories. M. and one for a private label (PLABEL).AFS Master Data: Business Scenario (1) Our polo shirt and jeans are available in different sizes and colors Polo shirt is available in four sizes . waist measurements) and colors (three dimensions) Stock may be segmented by different criteria. However.

A certain quantity will be sold to a retail store that requires a private label and special embroidery on the inside of the garment. The jacket will be sold with the manufacturer’s brand label. so the white jacket needs a lining. black and white. The fabric is light-weight.AFS Master Data: Business Scenario (2) A jacket will be manufactured in two colors. © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 2-8 .

AFS Master and Application Grids: Topic Objectives After completing this topic. you will be able to: Define material grids Explain the relationship between the material grid and the material master Explain how grid dimensions are determined and maintained Create a multi-dimensional master grid Describe a purchase grid / sales grid Report on the grid history © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 2-9 .

Up to three characteristics may be defined in a material grid. Categories can be used to differentiate product characteristics such as quality or other reasons for stock segmentation. The respective coverage strategies are defined plant independent on client level. different sizes. and qualities. colors. For example. © SAP AG ICP320 2-10 .AFS Structures ERP Standard AFS Client Level Quality Material Master Coverage Strategy 1 2 3 Categories Master Grid Dimensions © SAP AG 2008 Apparel and footwear products have a wide variety of characteristics. for example. a pair of jeans could be shown with three dimensions: waist. A coverage strategy with any number of categories can be assigned to a material master. inseam and color. The AFS solution accommodates these features by incorporating material grids and coverage strategies within the ERP Standard material master. Material grids are assigned to a material master at client level.

AFS Material Master Structure Valid dimensions Client Level Master Grid Category Structure Coverage Strategy Dimensions Example: .Quality .Width Categories Example: .Country of Origin SKU Level Defines SKU © SAP AG 2008 The decision of where to define material characteristics as grid dimensions or categories requires careful planning AFS provides information in addition to the material master The master grid allows the addition of multiple dimensions It is not necessary to have a separate material master number for each individual characteristic Coverage strategy allows you to include stock and requirement categories © SAP AG ICP320 2-11 .Logical Segmentation .Size .Color .

Relevances are maintained there too. with characteristics group /AFS/SAP-D Characteristic values are maintained in the same transaction (CT04). Grids may be maintained in Customizing (path see appendix) or from Logistics-->AFS Central Functions menu (paths see appendix). © SAP AG ICP320 2-12 . National Retail Federation (NRF) size and color codes may be assigned to the dimension in customizing from the particular grid.AFS Dimension Value Maintenance Relevance is described on the next slide Order will be used in Grid Display © SAP AG 2008 Dimensions are defined as characteristics. It is mandatory to maintain the characteristic values to be used in a grid.

the system refers to the material master record and checks the valid dimensions for this particular material. Each dimension has its own set of relevancies.Allows pricing at the dimension in the SD and MM applications with the proper condition record SEA . Dimensions can be made relevant so that they appear in certain applications and part of the material master record based on their need in each area.Allows seasonal data to be maintained for dimension in the AFS Basic view © SAP AG ICP320 2-13 .Weight and volume may be entered in the AFS Weights/Volumes tab of the material master record PRI . data at SKU level needs to be maintained only for those applications that need SKU level data. Therefore. Examples: DIM . Dimensions may be set as relevant or not relevant to selected applications in the system. Relevance-Assignment cannot be changed after the dimension is used Activate a dimension and it will be relevant for data in its designated application.AFS Dimension Relevance © SAP AG 2008 With every transaction in AFS.

Validity Dates Material Master © SAP AG 2008 When creating material grids.Company Code . blue. black.Material Number . size 6. The material grid is then assigned to a material master that is valid for a particular company code and date. © SAP AG ICP320 2-14 .AFS Material Grid Maintenance and Assignment Grid Maintenance Dimension Library . etc) Specify a valid-from-date for the particular grid. enter the possible dimensions such as color. size. and dimension values (for example. 10. 8.

Up to three dimensions are possible.AFS Material Grid Types: 1. color. for example. for example. inseam. © SAP AG ICP320 2-15 . 2 and 3 Dimensions 1 Dimension: Shoes Size 8 9 10 11 12 3 Dimensions: Jeans Color Waist Inseam 28 30 32 34 BLUE BLK 2 Dimensions: Jacket Size Color BLU RED 6 8 10 12 14 28 29 30 31 © SAP AG 2008 A material grid is a front-end tool that allows you to enter dimension information for your materials. size. style. waist. color. Dimensions within the grids are used to represent attributes of products. Dimensions can be numeric or alphanumeric. Dimensions can be up to eight characters long (for up to three dimensions combined).

It also needs to be activated in Customizing. for use in a different country. Sort relevant for Line Entry Views Axis relevant for Grid Entry Views (Z-Axis Radio Button Dimension) © SAP AG ICP320 2-16 . for example. Grid dimensions may be converted. Changes to the grid may be logged. A fast entry option is available with the Create dimension values button.Create Grid (1) Chose needed Grid values Flag valid value combinations © SAP AG 2008 There are three types of material grids: Master grid: Part of the material master Purchase grid: An application grid that is a subset of a master grid Sales grid: An application grid that is a subset of a master grid The order of dimensions may be sorted for use in the applications.AFS Material Grid .

If you create three-dimensional grids. © SAP AG ICP320 2-17 . Once a master grid has been saved it is possible to add more dimension values at any time.Create Grid (2) 3 Dimensional Master Grid: Jeans MASTER GRID 1: Color BLK BLU WHT 1: Color 3 Dimensional Master Grid: Shoes MASTER GRID BLK BRN BRG TAN 3:Inseam 2:Waist 31 32 33 34 35 3:Width 2:Size 6 6. Grids no longer used in any material may be deleted.AFS Material Grid . You need to decide how many dimensions to assign to your material grids.5 7 7. one of them must be represented by a button. You can create an initial grid and use it as a reference grid for creating new grids. You can create one grid and then use it for several materials. You must also decide which dimensions you will represent in your product. The relationship between the grids is maintained. The examples displayed above have “Color” represented as 3rd dimension. so careful planning must go into the decision regarding how you will set up your dimensions in the master grid.5 8 30 31 32 33 34 35 N M W © SAP AG 2008 Your products may have several attributes. You can only delete matrix values if the grid has not been used in any material. It is not possible to delete dimension values once entered.

choose buttons or select from menu <Edit> Select . Activate row/column: This feature allows you to activate values within an entire row or column.displayed as a button at the top . Rotate: This feature allows you to rotate the X and Y axis of your matrix.Row/Column .to the other dimensions.AFS Material Grid . Use the <Values row/column> feature to easily activate all the sizes for this item.Select All . Your next item is red and you also want to add this to your matrix in all sizes.Grid Creation Features X X X Activate row/column X X X X X X X X X X Rotate (viewing feature only) X X X Deactivate row/column X X X X X X Activate all grid values X X X X X X Deactivate all grid values X X © SAP AG 2008 X X X X Copy row/column The material grid features that are listed below facilitate the movement of data between and within grids. © SAP AG ICP320 2-18 . You have added a blue item to a grid in all sizes.Paste row/column. Copy current screen to all screens: You have a three-dimensional grid and want to copy the validated matrix entries from one dimension .Copy row/column . It is a viewing feature only. Example: Your dimensions are size and color. Delete row/column: Delete values from a row or column.Activate selected values Copy row/column: To copy the exact values to another row/column. Activate all grid values: Choose button or select from menu <Edit> Select .

you must also activate it in Customizing. In the above example.AFS Material Grid . You can view history data using the grid report function. To use history recording. Change history for that grid will be recorded. you can flag the grid history field. © SAP AG ICP320 2-19 .History Grid history activated New value combinations © SAP AG 2008 When creating a grid. grid history was activated after grid creation and some new size combinations have been allowed. Each change record only reports the changes done to the grid.

The code that is used for a material in the master grid can have a longer descriptive name in the applications. or a user parameter. customer.AFS Material Grid . vendor.Dimension Value Conversion (1) Definition in Customizing AFS Material Master User Settings Coversion values in CT04 AFS Customer Master © SAP AG 2008 Dimension value conversion is used to convert values as set up in the material master grid. © SAP AG ICP320 2-20 . You will not see the result of the conversion in the master grid because these are system values. For instance. Examples: A customer. or country may use a different name to describe your material. a size 6 in the United States could be converted to a size 36 for Germany. That can be verified using a check report. each of its values have to be converted. If you decide to use conversion for a dimension ID. For example. Color 100 in the master grid could translate into a color WHITE in the sales department’s applications. You can only see the conversion in the applications. vendor. This conversion can be based on material.

The user parameter to turn the conversion off for individual users is /AFS/NO_SIZE_CONV Conversion can be activated per dimension. You can turn conversion off per individual user.Dimension Value Conversion (2) Sales Order Entry Chose Conv.AFS Material Grid . it is no longer possible to mix entries of system and converted values. the line for entry is blocked so you cannot enter any grid values. To ensure that all values in the conversion tables are unique. Type © SAP AG 2008 A conversion button exists every application that deals with grid values. © SAP AG ICP320 2-21 . You can switch between the system conversion type which represents the base values and the preferred or most suitable conversion type which are both represented in a lighter shade. Every grid value must be convertible for all dimensions. All other conversion types that are applicable are represented in a darker shade. If not.

If cells are deactivated in the related master grid.AFS Application Grids Master Grid Size XS S Color BLK WHT RED M L XL XXL Sales or Purchase Grid Size XS S Color BLK WHT RED M L XL XXL Sales or Purchase Grid Size XS S Color BLK WHT RED M L XL XXL © SAP AG 2008 Purchase and sales grids complement master grids in that a relationship among customers. these sizes/colors will not be displayed as valid for purchasing purposes. materials. Example: If a vendor can only provide a limited range of sizes or colors. a purchase grid can be created specifically for that vendor excluding those particular sizes or colors. © SAP AG ICP320 2-22 . it is important to keep the following constraints in mind: Purchase and sales grids are always a subset of a master grid. In purchase order entry. However. vendor and users can be established for explicit control via the condition technique. It is not possible to add or delete existing dimensions from a purchase / sales grid. they are deactivated in the associated purchase/ sales grid.

for example. material/vendor. © SAP AG ICP320 2-23 . Purchase grids can be linked. Material xyz Sales Grid Shirt-L XXL © SAP AG 2008 A purchase grid is a subset of a master grid restricting sizes that can be procured by a particular vendor. via a condition technique.AFS Application Grids .Conditions Master Grid Size XS S Color BLK WHT RED M L XL XXL Sales Grid Size XS S Color BLK WHT RED M L XL XXL Condition Record Customer…. 3000 Valid from … to . with purchase orders. and so on.…. to allow detailed control over dimensions in MM related areas..... grid. The Grid determination protocol in the purchasing documents shows how the respective grid was determined. to a material.

Purchase grid PURCHASE1-99 was created in reference to its master grid SHIRT. master grid SHIRT was created.Reports 1 2 © SAP AG 2008 Several different materials share the same master grid.used-list for material grids Associated material grids Changes to material grids © SAP AG ICP320 2-24 . It will not lose the link. In this example. Reports: (AFS Central Functions Grids Grid Reports) Where.AFS Grids .

AFS Categories and Coverage Strategy: Topic Objectives At the conclusion of this topic. you will be able to: Explain a category structure Explain the relationship between requirement and stock categories within a coverage strategy Create a coverage strategy and maintain the relationship between stock and requirement categories © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 2-25 .

Quality .Size .AFS Material Master Structure Valid dimensions Client Level Master Grid Category Structure Coverage Strategy SKU Level Dimensions Example: .Logical Segmentation .Width Categories Example: .Country of Origin Defines SKU © SAP AG 2008 The decision of where to define material characteristics as grid dimensions or categories requires careful planning AFS provides information in addition to the material master The master grid allows the addition of multiple dimensions It is not necessary to have a separate material master number for each individual characteristic Coverage strategy allows you to include stock and requirement categories © SAP AG ICP320 2-26 .Color .

Multiple category field structures. © SAP AG ICP320 2-27 . You can create categories to segregate customer segments. levels of quality. Categories are linked to the material master via assignment of the coverage structure and strategy. Quality 2 would be your second.AFS Segmentation with Categories 1 SEGMENT Customer A Customer B Customer C 2 QUALITY Quality 1 Quality 2 3 COUNTRY OF ORIGIN Country X Country Y Country Z © SAP AG 2008 Categories provide an additional layer of detail that allows you to further specify or characterize your product. country of origin. The structure of categories can be freely defined by customer. one of your categories might be Quality which might be defined at two levels. The definition of categories is optional. and so on. dynamic category content and application relevance are available. For example. Quality 1 would be your first grade goods.

However. It establishes the links between your stock and requirement categories. If you refer to the slide above. but which are AFS materials. In other words. A blank coverage strategy (No Coverage Strategy) is created automatically upon creation of a plant. © SAP AG ICP320 2-28 . a blank category is defined and is assigned a corresponding stock category of Customer Segment A.Basic Concept Blank Requirement Category Customer A Customer B Customer C Coverage Strategy Customer Segment A Customer Segment A Customer Segment B Customer Segment C Stock Category © SAP AG 2008 A coverage strategy defines the method by which the requirement categories are matched against existing stock categories. you could define your blank category to include other stock segments.AFS Coverage Strategy . a sales order that does not reference any requirement category can only be satisfied by stock from Customer Segment A. It is used for materials that do not require a category and coverage strategy.

© SAP AG ICP320 2-29 .AFS Category Types in SAP Documents Sales Order Requirement Categories Planned Independent Requirements Purchase Requisition Planned Order Purchase Order Production Order Stock Categories © SAP AG 2008 Requirement and stock categories are used in these documents respectively.

a sales order is placed for 200 pieces of category MLABEL-1. For the remaining 50 pieces a new planned order gets created for category MLABEL-1. but only 50 pieces are in stock. The Requirement/Stock Allocation table is checked to see whether alternative categories are allowed. © SAP AG ICP320 2-30 . as defined in the respective customizing table. Only 100 pieces of that category are left in stock.AFS Categories Allocation Sales Order 200 pieces Category MLABEL-1 Check Stock STOCK 100 pieces Category MLABEL-1 Requirement / Stock Allocation Requirement Level Stock Category Category Check Stock MLABEL-1 MLABEL-1 1 2 MLABEL-1 MLABEL-2 STOCK 50 pieces Category MLABEL-2 Requirement to Stock Conversion Requirement Category Stock Category MLABEL-1 © SAP AG 2008 MLABEL-1 Planned Order 50 pieces Stock Category Category MLABEL-1 In the above example. Category MLABEL-2 is a possibility.

You can also assign a particular category field structure to a material type so that when you use a material type the system automatically uses the correct category field structure. Careful thought must be put into the basic set-up of the category structure. © SAP AG ICP320 2-31 .AFS Category Structure . it is very difficult to change once the categories have been used.Maintenance Categories Define Category Structure Category Fields – Defined as Characteristics Category Field Relevance Signs Defaults – Automatic Filling Define Coverage Strategies © SAP AG 2008 As the category structure is an additional value to the material number. Category fields are defined as characteristics Default values can be set up for the category fields (automatic filling). Category fields automatically become the basis for requirement and stock categories. The system automatically defaults plant independent category structures. multiple Category Structures are available. To ease work with categories.

you enter category MLABEL.Relevances © SAP AG 2008 Category fields have relevances to define which master data and applications should be controlled by categories. For example. the default categories for the applications can be defined. For more sophisticated category determination a user exit is available. the category market will not have any influence on EAN numbers. you enter category MLABEL-1. the system checks if MLABEL is defined as valid value for the user defined category field LABEL) VLC – check of valid category combinations defined in the category strategy (e.g. in this case the relevances can be set off. you can now ignore category fields in the complete category check. Values can be dynamically filled via customizing or programming. In Customizing.AFS Category Structure . In addition. if you set off the VLC check for a category field this means that no combination check is done. The corresponding relevances for defining the category check are FLC and VLC: FLC – check of category entries against the field values (e. the system checks if MLABEL-1 is a valid category combination defined as stock and/or requirement category in the coverage strategy. the category field “Market” does not have any influence on the EAN numbering. In the material master the EAN numbers do not have to be defined on the market level. this also means you no longer have to maintain all possible combinations of valid categories) © SAP AG ICP320 2-32 . the relevances for requirement and stock categories can be defined.g. You no longer have to maintain all possible combinations of valid categories. While definition of the category fields as characteristics.

and Production Planning. Materials Management. © SAP AG ICP320 2-33 . leave them undefined.Maintenance (1) Categories Define Category Structure Category Fields – Defined as Characteristics Category Field Relevance Signs Defaults – Automatic Filling Define Coverage Strategies Category Combinations © SAP AG 2008 Category maintenance is a multi-step procedure that requires input from all logistical areas. Sales and Distribution. If the customer does not expect to use defined rules of requirement and stock categories. The valid category combinations need to be set up first. Before Coverage Strategies can be set up you need to lock in the Coverage Structure which you want to use as basis for your strategy.AFS Coverage Strategy .

Requirements Consumption © SAP AG 2008 The above slide shows how to set up the allocation of categories in the different applications.AFS Coverage Strategy . you can define the consumption modes for sales order per category. This needs to be done for the primary material as well as the dependent requirements. If no stock is available at all.g. another category may be used if it has been defined. same for PLABEL) # indicates that any category field value can be allocated ( e. DE ## .g. ******* ******* . If there is not enough stock available for one category. you determine which requirement category should be matched with which stock category. Wildcards can be used for the allocation definition: * indicates that the equal category field value should be allocated (e.Maintenance (2) Categories Define Coverage Strategies Category Combinations ARUN/MRP: Requirement/Stock Allocation Dependent Requirements / Stock transfer Requirement to Stock Conversion Planned Ind.for the category field COUNTRY the system can allocate any stock category to requirement category DE) © SAP AG ICP320 2-34 . requirement category MLABEL should be allocated to stock category MLABEL. If stock is available. you must define which category should be procured or produced.for the category field LABEL the system should look for the same label type when allocating stock. If independent requirements are used. e.g.

AFS Coverage Strategy . category Level CoNoEC Stock-Category MRP-Mod.Maintenance (3) MRP: Requirement/Stock Allocation CStr TP TP TP Reqmt.Stock # means: any value can be fulfilled with any value © SAP AG 2008 If a sales order specifies a requirement category of MLABEL-1 it would have to be satisfied by a stock category MLABEL-1 as a first priority. MLABEL-1 MLABEL-1 PLABEL-1 1 1 1 1 1 2 MLABEL-1 MLABEL-2 PLABEL-1 Instead of maintaining each combination explicitly the special characters * and # can be used: Requirement * . © SAP AG ICP320 2-35 . you can define whether a MLABEL-2 could satisfy that requirement as a second option in case MLABEL-1 is out of stock.Stock * means: both have same value Requirement * . MRP modules are function modules for further prioritization of assigned stock. In this table.

only first and second quality are possible field values for the Manufacturer’s label MLABEL-. It will enter the correct number of asterisks to the field lengths. only combinations of categories will be displayed that have previously been defined. To facilitate the entry of asterisks for exact matches you can choose the ‘Insert rule field’ button.Maintenance (4) Category-Popup Requirement Category Label Quality Country Restrict possible values Continue Valid categories Insert rule field MLABEL Manufacturer‘s Label X Cancel Quality Lower val. If this box is not checked all values defined in the system will be displayed.AFS Coverage Strategy . In the example above. © SAP AG ICP320 2-36 . 12Short text of category field values 1st quality 2nd quality © SAP AG 2008 When checking the ‘restrict possible values’ box.

All other coverage strategies can no longer be changed © SAP AG ICP320 2-37 . Strategy Matl. This category structure field may not be changed later. However. If left blank the material is not used with categories.Category Assignment AFS Basic Data Master Grid Grid determination procedure SD Grid determination procedure MM MGF SD0001 Cat. you must leave the coverage strategy field "blank" as this is the only coverage strategy type that can be changed in the material master. a structure must be added.ID 0001 0001 TM01 AFS Status © SAP AG 2008 Define the category structure for the material.Conv. Structure MM0001 Cov. The plant independent coverage strategy has to be entered on the AFS basic view and will be used for all plants.AFS Material Master . so if the material will ever use categories. you must use the "blank" coverage strategy. If you do not want to use categories for a material. if you are even remotely considering using categories later.

If the material contains neither dimensions nor categories. it can be either a standard material or an AFS “NO GRID” material.Use of Dimensions and Categories in a Material DIMENSIONS CATEGORIES YES YES NO AFS Material AFS Material NO AFS Material Standard Material or AFS Material © SAP AG 2008 If the material contains dimensions. or a combination of both. © SAP AG ICP320 2-38 . If you want to set up such a an AFS “NO GRID” material. it is an AFS material. categories. during material creation you have to set the flag “NO GRID” on the tab strip “AFS Basic Data”.

Material Master: Topic Objectives At the conclusion of this topic. you will be able to: Create and maintain a material master with AFS data Include master grid in the material master Set up fabric content codes Explain the usage of seasonality in MM/PP © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 2-39 .

you can convert AFS-materials into standard materials and vice versa if no transaction data exists for the particular material master.Converting AFS-Material Standard Material © SAP AG 2008 In AFS. © SAP AG ICP320 2-40 . You then have to maintain the corresponding entries in these views in order to use this material in the AFS application or in sales order processing. This conversion can either be done in simulation mode or as an update on the database. when converting a standard material into an AFS material. AFS views will be added to the material master. For example.

Material Master Setup Create Material Industry Sector © SAP AG 2008 The industry sector determines to which industry the material applies. The industry sector decides: Which views are displayed and in which order What industry-specific data is displayed © SAP AG ICP320 2-41 .

One material master is created for each material in the ERP system. Loc Stock Basic Data 1&2 AFS Basic Data Classifications Sales Org 1 & 2 Sales Gen / Plant Data AFS Sales Data Sales Text Purchasing & Text Foreign Trade Export and Import MRP 1 2 3 4 AFS MRP AFS Foreign Trade Forecasting Work Scheduling Production Resource/Tools Storage 1 & 2 Warehouse Management1 & 2 AFS Warehouse Management 1 AFS Views ERP Standard Views Additional Data AFS enhanced: © SAP AG 2008 AFS Weight and Volume Additional EANs The material master is the foundation for all logistics functions of the SAP ERP System. Specific AFS views: AFS Basic Data AFS Sales Data AFS MRP AFS Warehouse Management 1 AFS Valuation Some Standard ERP views have been changed: Basic Data 2 Purchasing Accounting 1 NOTE: By selecting just one of the AFS views.Material Master Views Quality Management AFS Quality Management Accounting 1&2 AFS Valuation Costing 1&2 Plant Stock / Stor. Five views have been added for AFS materials. you automatically create an AFS material © SAP AG ICP320 2-42 .

A separate material master for each size is not necessary. Define the category structure for the material. Grid Determination Procedure: Grid determination procedure defines how a grid in SD or MM is selected for the specific material (condition technique). the master grid cannot be replaced ! Master Grid: The master grid is used to define dimensions for a material.AFS Basic Data View Create Material AFS Basic Data © SAP AG 2008 AFS Status: ! Once this status has been flagged.Material Master . If left blank the material is not used with categories. Assign coverage strategy on this view © SAP AG ICP320 2-43 .

it is released and then it is no longer possible to change the coverage strategy.AFS MRP View AFS MRP Status Create Material AFS MRP Data © SAP AG 2008 Coverage Strategy: Coverage strategies are used to match stock categories to requirement categories. The only exception to this is if the coverage strategy is "blank". On the AFS MRP view the coverage strategy is displayed AFS Status MRP: Once this status has been flagged.Material Master . © SAP AG ICP320 2-44 .

view of the material master. EAN/UPC may now be maintained in the Additional Data . EAN/UPC numbers represent the barcode which is printed on each product. Functionality has been developed to reuse EAN/UPC numbers from archived materials.Material Master .Additional Data EAN/UPC Product Code Numbers Create Material Additional Data © SAP AG 2008 You can include EAN (European Article Number) and UPC (Universal Product Code) product code numbers with your materials. © SAP AG ICP320 2-45 . All companies worldwide are allocated their own UPC number range. EAN/UPC code is stored at schedule line level.

MM and PP. the material contains a material grid with color and size information as well as a coverage strategy for segmenting the requirement and stock by the manufacturer’s or private label. the one-dimensional grid attributes the size information. In this case. Regard the dependencies in all modules like SD. © SAP AG ICP320 2-46 . the information below refers only to color and size. you may want to consider the options outlined above.Data Modeling T-SHIRT Material Grid for Color and Size (two dimensional) Coverage Strategy for Segmentation T-SHIRT BLUE Material Grid for Size (one dimensional) Coverage Strategy for Segmentation T-SHIRT BLUE MLABEL Material Grid for Size (one dimensional) © SAP AG 2008 When implementing AFS and setting up material master data. In the first example. in the third example. The next example illustrates that not only style information but also color may be set at header level. Finally. and the coverage strategy the segmentation. the color as well as the segmentation is kept at material level.

) requires that certain products be available for their corresponding season. with special needs to “mark down” or “move” inventory that will soon be out of season. fall/winter. Please refer to ICP310 for details. Seasons are supported in AFS Sales and Distribution.AFS Seasons Spring/Summer Fall/Winter © SAP AG 2008 The seasons of business (spring/summer.Material Master . back-to-school. Christmas etc. Seasons are supported in AFS Materials Management and Production © SAP AG ICP320 2-47 .

Same process for Planned orders and Production orders as in Purchasing for purchase requisitions and purchase orders The season determination is based on delivery date and/or order date.. take over the season into batches Production . © SAP AG ICP320 2-48 ..Material Master . Determination in Sales Order .Transaction AFS stock season for season determination Material Master ....Display at item level Purchase Order .Selection of a season level for MM/PP Material Requirement Planning ... in Material Master Definition Season/. © SAP AG 2008 Season/collection/theme is an essential apparel and footwear industry feature that needs to be supported in the complete logistical cycle. Manual selection of season also possible..If season is fixed in material master.Production order (unique) Season/.. PROCESS Season/.Display at item level Goods Receipt .Take over season from requisition or manual selection of season .Purchase requisition .. Determination Flagged as „fix“: Material is mapped to exactly one Season/..Season determination during creation of purchase requisitions Purchase Requisition (manual) .Planned order ..Purchase order .level for Material Season/. in batches INFO SYSTEMS AND ANALYSIS Information Systems / BW / Controlling... Scope of Functionality : Master Data .Season determination or manual selection of season .AFS Seasonality in MM/PP SALES CUSTOMIZING SUPPLY CHAIN INVENTORY MANAGEMENT Season / Collection / Theme Definition MASTER DATA Assign Season/.

you will be able to: List the different types of AFS BOMs Define BOMs for an AFS product Create an AFS BOM Apply quantity distribution profiles in a BOM Analyze different BOM reports © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 2-49 .Bill of Materials: Topic Objectives At the conclusion of this topic.

© SAP AG ICP320 2-50 .Master Data: Bill of Materials & Routing Master Data Material Master Record Bill of Materials Routing © SAP AG 2008 Master data is comprised of material master records. bills of material and routings.

© SAP AG ICP320 2-51 .AFS BOM Types Standard BOM Assortment Fabric (AFS Material) Buttons (Standard Material) Zipper (AFS Material) Standard BOM: Prepack Golf Pants (AFS Material) Golf Shirt (AFS Material) Golf Ball (Standard Material) Shirt (AFS Material) Pants (AFS Material) Cap (Standard Material) © SAP AG 2008 In AFS there are two types of BOMs: AFS Standard BOM AFS Assortments AFS Pre-packs are part of the standard BOM. Pre-pack and assortment BOMs are used in SD only.

© SAP AG ICP320 2-52 .Possibilities for BOM Structure AFS AFS STD AFS STD STD = Standard ERP STD STD AFS STD © SAP AG 2008 An AFS Bill of Material may contain standard materials as components. but you cannot have an AFS component below a standard material.

independent of their levels in the BOM. © SAP AG ICP320 2-53 . For example. it needs to be defined as a regular AFS material. a golf pack will always consist of a shirt. If a material is used as header material in a pre-pack. All items.AFS Pre-pack Grid A BLU RED GRN X X X 36 38 X X X 40 X X X MRP Golf Pack Shirt (AFS Material) Grid B 36 38 40 BLU RED GRN © SAP AG 2008 Pants (AFS Material) Grid C 28 29 30 31 28 X X X X 30 X X X X 32 X X X X Cap (Standard Material) MRP 1 1 1 A pre-pack is a set of predefined combinations of quantities and sizes in the BOM structure. The header material may contain a master grid that is different from the grids of the components. pants and cap in the sizes relating to a size of the header material. are MRP relevant.

and golf balls. A set material BOM is the same concept as a phantom assembly in the standard system. golf pants. you must activate the Set material field in the material master record. You enter the requirements at SKU level when entering the sales order. The components may have differing master grids. The golf shirt and pants have a grid but the golf balls are a standard material. in that the header material is merely a grouping of two or more finished products. The header material has no grid.AFS Assortment BOM Set Material No Master Grid Golf Set NO MRP Shirt (AFS Material) Grid A 36 38 40 BLU RED GRN © SAP AG 2008 Pants (AFS Material) Grid B 28 29 30 31 28 X X X X 30 32 X X X Golf Ball (Standard Material) MRP 1 1 1 An assortment is usually put together at the request of the customer whereby the quantity and sizes of the set may vary but not the items within the BOM structure. a customer may want to have an assortment consisting of a golf shirt. The components are stockable items. If a material is a header material used in a sales BOM for an assortment. The sizes and quantities are allocated when the BOM is exploded after a sales order has been entered. The header material contains no master grid but may have categories. The material grids are defined in the material master of its components. For example. © SAP AG ICP320 2-54 .

You can have different grids on header and component level. the quantities must be maintained in the grid view (see manual cell assignment). these need to be maintained in the bill of material.AFS Standard BOM Grid A 6 8 10 12 14 BLK WHT RED X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Jacket (AFS Material) MRP Fabric (AFS Material) Grid B BLK WHT X X Zipper (AFS Material) Grid C RED X Button (Standard Material) 44 46 48 50 BLU RED GRN X X X X X X X X X X X MRP © SAP AG 2008 As AFS materials are defined with grids. Quantities entered in the BOM on line item level should be realistic. © SAP AG ICP320 2-55 . If you have a grid on header and component level. The line item value will be used to determine the consumption in MRP if planning is done beyond the SKU level horizon (see also Materials Requirements Planning).

The grid of the component must at least have the same valid sizes as the header material grid. The same applies to ERP Standard materials that contain no grid components. © SAP AG ICP320 2-56 . Each cell in the header grid will be automatically assigned to the respective cell in the component’s grid.AFS BOM: Automatic Cell Assignment Grid A 28 29 30 31 X X X X 28 X X X X 30 32 X X X X Jeans (AFS Material) Jeans Fabric (AFS Material) Grid B 28 29 30 31 32 28 X X X X X 30 X X X X X 32 X X X X X 33 X X X X X © SAP AG 2008 Pocket Lining (AFS Material) Grid C 28 29 30 31 28 X X X X 30 X X X X 32 X X X X Button (Standard Material) AFS materials with a grid may contain components with a grid of the same structure as the header material grid.

© SAP AG ICP320 2-57 .AFS BOM: Manual Cell Assignment Grid A 6 8 10 12 14 BLK WHT RED X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Jacket (AFS Material) Self (AFS Material) Grid B BLK WHT X X Lining (Standard Material) Zipper (AFS Material) Grid C RED X 17 18 19 BLK WHT RED X X X X X X X X X © SAP AG 2008 AFS materials with a grid may also contain components with a grid of a different structure. Every cell in the header material grid must be assigned manually to the corresponding cell in the component's grid.

for example all blacks.AFS BOM: Manual Cell Assignment using Fast Entry BOM Item Component Quantity SELF 1.85 1.85 1.85 M Header Material Grid Component 6BLK 8BLK 10BLK 6WHT 8WHT 10WHT 6RED BLK WHT RED 1.85 1.85 © SAP AG 2008 A fast entry mode facilitates the maintenance of quantities. © SAP AG ICP320 2-58 . and enter quantities for them at one time.85 1.85 1. You can group the dimensions together.85 1.

54 1.48 1.50 1. For example. but a size 10 may need an 18 inch zipper. 1.52 1. lining is only needed for the white jacket. Summarized BOM (TC: CS13) In certain application areas in a company. Dimension dependent components. Characteristics of AFS BOMs are: Dimension dependent consumption. Dimension dependent dimensions. Multi-level BOM (TC: CS12) This reporting function determines all components (assemblies and individual parts) in a product and displays them in their structural context for production.AFS Bill of Material (1) AFS BOMs can be dimension-dependent Grid A Jacket (AFS Material) 6 8 10 12 14 BLK WHT X X X X X X X X X X Self (AFS Material) Grid B 6 BLK WHT 8 10 12 14 1. Components that are also assemblies are exploded further. which you can restrict using various criteria. You can view the master grid of the header material when working with any component.50 1. 2. For example.56 1. you need a quick overview of all the parts required to make a product. © SAP AG ICP320 2-59 . This reporting function produces a complete count of the assemblies and individual components.48 1.52 1.This BOM reporting function shows which components make up the individual assemblies across the product structure. a black size 6 jacket will use a black 17 inch zipper. Display a BOM level by level (TC:CS11) . even if the component is a non-AFS material. For example. Furthermore AFS supports different reports for BOM explosion. A black size 8 jacket may use the same zipper. Components may be either AFS materials or standard materials. such as material requirements planning (MRP) and costing.54 1. the use of self for the jacket differs slightly for the various sizes.56 Lining (Standard Material) Grid A 6 8 10 12 14 BLK X X X X X WHT Zipper (AFS Material) Grid C 17 18 19 BLK WHT 1 Deviation Quantities © SAP AG 2008 Zero Quantities Manual Component Quantities The AFS BOM includes the grid information for all components. 3.

85 WHT10 RED6 1. The factor can be changed manually and recalculated in percent for specific SKUs.85 Component Quality BLK6 BLK 1.98 WHT8 1. Note. Mass Change functionality is available for BOMs with a quantity distribution rule. Once a quantity distribution rule is entered into a BOM it can no longer be changed. zero quantities are calculated for the respective SKUs. In case the header material has a different structure than the component grid.89 1.Grid Number Prod. AFS supports the check report for quantity distribution profiles.profile TP-SELF TP-FABRIC TP-SELF TP-FABRIC Text 2% INCR.00 Base grid value BLK10 1. check whether the BOM quantities match the quantities calculated by the quantity distribution profile and see if the grids in the BOM match the quantity distribution profile. RULE BLCK 8 FABRIC Material Grid No.00 WHT10 RED6 1.85 M Distribution Profile FABRIC BLK8 1.81 WHT RED © SAP AG 2008 SELF 1.98 WHT RED BLK8 1. the component’s SKUs and their factor have to be assigned manually to the respective header SKU. Header Material Grid No. © SAP AG ICP320 2-60 . The quantity distribution profile can be used for grid value assignment of components to header materials in the BOM independent of the material. Recalculation can be done linear or progressive emanated from a base grid value. Comp BLK6 BLK 0. With this check function you can check if the quantity distribution profile is correct.02 1.85 BLK10 1. the factor is equal to one by applying the ‘write header SKUs’ functionality. Example: The consumption of fabric grows per size.89 WHT6 1.02 WHT6 0.81 AFS facilitates the bill of material´s maintenance by a quantity distribution profile and the ability to display and enter appropriate factor values. Note: The recalculation functionality can only be applied for AFS materials with a grid that contains components with a grid of the same structure as the header material grid.distr. In case the header material and component base are on the same grid. see which quantity distribution profile is used in which BOM.Grid No. that if no factor is maintained. Comp Qty.BOM Maintenance using Distribution Profile2 Quantity Distribution Profiles Distribution Factor Prod.81 WHT8 1.

© SAP AG ICP320 2-61 .AFS Bill of Material (2) AFS BOMs can be category-dependent Jacket (AFS Material) Manufacturer’s Label Category MLABEL Private Label Category PLABEL © SAP AG 2008 Components in a BOM may be dependent on the category of the header material. a jacket of category PLABEL will have a private label instead . A jacket of category MLABEL will have a manufacturer’s label as one of it’s components.

AFS Master Data: Unit Summary (1) You should now be able to: Define material grids Explain the relationship between the material grid and the material master Explain how grid dimensions are determined and maintained Create a multi-dimensional master grid Describe a purchase grid © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 2-62 .

AFS Master Data: Unit Summary (2) You should now be able to: Report on the grid history Explain the relationship between requirement and stock categories within a coverage strategy Create a coverage strategy and maintain the relationship between stock and requirement categories Set up categories in Customizing Create and maintain a material master with AFS data © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 2-63 .

AFS Master Data: Unit Summary (3) You should now be able to: Set up fabric content code in Customizing Explain the usage of seasonality in MM/PP List the different BOM types Create an AFS BOM Apply quantity distribution profiles in a BOM © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 2-64 .

## = Group Number 1-1 Create Two Dimensions ID’s as characteristics. Our shirts and jeans are available in different colors and sizes. you will be able to: • Explain how grid dimensions are determined and maintained by creating a two. ID LMS_xx Data XS S M L XL CLR_xx BLK BLU GRN YLW Sort Sequence Relevance 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 EAN/UPC NRF Color Code Pricing Material Valuation EAN/UPC NRCSize code Material Val.Exercise Unit: Topic: AFS Master Data Material and Application Grids At the conclusion of this exercise.and three-dimensional master grid Global Fashion produces and procures a number of items for their line. We therefore need to create one master grid for our shirts (MGMII-##) and one for our jeans (MGMIII-##). Pricing © SAP AG ICP320 2-65 .

Choose the correct material grid type. M. Increment1) Radio button set for color. 1-2-1 Create a master grid for a shirt consisting of your created sizes and colors using MGMII-## as your material grid name. inseam and color. S. using MGMIII-## as your product grid name. © SAP AG ICP320 2-66 . Data Mat.grid no Characteristic 1 Characteristic 2 Characteristic 3 MGMIII-## CLR_## WST (Waist:26-38. Increment 2) INS(^Inseam:26-32. Data Mat. XL) CLR_##(Colors) Flag: Grid Change History Create a master grid for jeans with waist. L.grid no Characteristic 1 Characteristic 2 1-2-2 M MGMII-## LMS_## (XS.1-2 Create two master grids.grid type Mat.

Create your coverage strategy TMCOV-## in Customizing and assign it to the category structure. The system automatically defines for each assignment of the coverage strategy a default rule. ## = Group Number 2-1 Create a category structure. you will be able to: • Maintain the relationship between requirement and stock categories by creating a coverage strategy Global Fashion manufactures a ladies’ casual jacket. We can have 1st quality and seconds. MLABEL-1-. the name of each category will be a combination of the label and the quality. Therefore. The categories we want to use are 1 and 2.Exercise Unit: Topic: AFS Master Data Categories and Coverage Strategy At the conclusion of this exercise. hence delete the already existing rules and define your own rules: © SAP AG ICP320 2-67 . for example. 2-1-1 Create your structure TM## and use categories with related stock and requirement categories LAB (Label) and QUA (Quality) and lock the structure. one for a manufacturer’s brand label (MLABEL-). We need to define a coverage strategy (TMCOV-##) to establish the relationship between the requirement and stock categories. In our case we like to define our own rules. With this default rule the use of the coverage strategy is given. Seconds will only be of category MLABEL-2-. just in case you do not like to define your own rule. Before the creation check the category relevancies for: Label EAN FLC MRP PRC PRI RSC VLC 2-1-2 Quality FLC MRP PRC PRI RSC VLC The coverage strategy defines how requirement categories will be covered by stock category. and one for a private label (PLABEL-). We also need to classify stock according to its quality.

Use the following data: Coverage Strategy Stock Category Coverage Strategy TMCOV-## Requirement Category ********* 2-1-5 TMCOV-## ********* 2-1-6 If no stock or insufficient stock of the required category is at hand. If that category is out of stock. However.2-1-3 2-1-4 In customizing define at your coverage strategy the category combinations. Maintain the category of the planned independent requirements that sales orders of a certain category are to consume. Coverage strategy TMCOV-## Categories for the dependent requirements will be adopted from the header material during the BOM explosion. To be able to use categories in MRP you have to maintain the relationship between the stock and requirement categories in Customizing. Requirements Consumption.as a first priority. the system creates planned orders or purchase requisitions depending on the internal or external procurement of the material. Maintain the table to assign the allocation of secondary requirement categories to finished products. Define Arun/MRP/Stock Allocation.delivered. If a customer orders category MLABEL-. Use all possible category values of Label and Quality. Use the following data: Coverage Strategy TMCOV-## Requirement Category ********* Stock Category ********* 2-1-7 Planned Ind. Try to use wildcards to reduce data maintenance. we will deliver MLABEL-1. it would also be possible to deliver MLABEL-2-. the customer ordering the private label he will always have category PLABEL. Use the following data: Coverage Strategy SO Requirement category Level CoNoEC SO Requirement category ######### TMCOV-## ********* 1 1 © SAP AG ICP320 2-68 . Maintain the sourcing proposal table to define the categories to be produced or procured for your material.

you will be able to: • • Create a material master for an AFS material Carry out a grid report Your T-Shirt. Therefore we need to create a material master (material type HAWA) and link the master grid and coverage strategy to it. © SAP AG ICP320 2-69 . 3-1 Create a Material 3-1-1 Data Material Industry sector Material type Plant Sales organization Distribution channel TM-TSHIRT-## F (Apparel and Footwear) HAWA (Trading goods) 0001 (copy from 0001) 0001 (copy from 0001) 01 (copy from 01) Use TM-SHIRT as your reference material. We will carry out a grid report to show the materials that this grid was assigned to. available in different colors and sizes.Exercise Unit: Topic: AFS Master Data Material Master At the conclusion of this exercise. is procured externally.

Data Product grid MGMII-## © SAP AG ICP320 2-70 .Views • • Basic data 1/ 2 AFS Basic data Master grid: Category structure: Coverage strategy: AFS status: MGMII-## as created in exercise 1-2-1 TM## TMCOV-## Yes • • • • • • • • • 3-1-2 Sales: Sales organization data 1/ 2 Sales: general/plant AFS Sales data Purchasing MRP1-4 AFS MRP AFS status MRP: Storage 1 Accounting 1 Yes Carry out a grid report for your master grid MGMII-##. Show the materials that this grid was assigned to.

XL Line conversion 34. 36. M. 38. 4-1-1 Define the name of your conversion type. 42 Grid conversion 34. no additional entry is necessary but still check the set-up in the next table. To be able to use the same material master and master grid. you can use grid conversion to translate the sizes into the corresponding German sizes. it will be marketed and labeled with the German ladies’ sizes 34. you will be able to: • Convert dimensions from a value generally used in the system to a name used in specific applications TM-TSHIRT-## is manufactured in sizes XS. 46. 42 4-1-2 4-1-3 4-1-4 © SAP AG ICP320 2-71 . 38. For the German market. Assign your conversion type GER-## Data All ID-fields blank Consecutive number ## Conversion type GER-## Define the conversion for the dimensions values. Data Conversion type GER-## To make the conversion available to all materials. M. 40. and XL for the international market. S. Maintain the settings for the grid conversion in Customizing (IMG). 42. 38. 40. S.Exercise Optional Unit: Topic: AFS Master Data Conversion of Dimensions At the conclusion of this exercise. and 50. L. L. Data Conversion type GER-## Characteristic type LMS_## Characteristic values XS. 4-1 Define the conversion for the characteristics (dimensions) of your material TM-TSHIRT##. 36.

Make sure that the sizes of your master grid MGMII-## in the material master of TM-TSHIRT-## changed from the international to German ladies´ sizes. You can check that in the AFS Basic Data view. Additional EANs.4-1-5 4-1-6 Change the set-up of your material grid to allow for grid value conversion. At the same time check the sizes of your master grid MGMII-## again. for example. Data Plant Sales organization Distribution channel 0001 0001 01 © SAP AG ICP320 2-72 .

Exercise
Unit: Topic: AFS Master Data Bill of Materials (BOM)

At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to: Create a BOM with deviation and zero quantities taking the following into consideration: Fabric consumption for larger sizes Lining component only to be used for white garment Different labeling for wholesale and retail products apply Global Fashion’s casual jacket (TM-JACKET-##) will be manufactured in two colors, black and white. As the fabric is lightweight, the white jacket needs a lining. The jacket will be sold with the manufacturer’s brand label. A certain quantity will be sold to a retail store that requires special embroidery with the shop’s name on the inside of the garment and its own private label. As a consequence, stock segmentation is done with categories. The requirement and stock categories for the manufacturer’s label are MLABEL-*- and PLABEL-1- for the private label. 5-1 Create a material master TM-JACKET-## for the jacket with reference to TP-JACKET. Use JACKET as the grid and CP01 as the coverage strategy. Create the following views and check the AFS-specific views for accuracy: 5-1-1 Material Industry sector Material type Copy from Plant Sales organization Distribution channel TM-JACKET-## F (Apparel and Footwear) FERT (Finished Products) Material 0001 0001 01 TP-Jacket (copy from 0001) (copy from 0001) (copy from 01)

© SAP AG

ICP320

2-73

Views: click through every view! Basic data 1 / 2 AFS Basic data Master grid: Category structure: Coverage strategy: AFS Status: JACKET CP01 CP-CS1 Yes

Sales: Sales organization data 1 Sales: General/plant data AFS sales data Purchasing MRP1-4 AFS MRP AFS Status MRP: Work scheduling General Plant Data/Storage 1 Accounting 1 5-2 Create a BOM for your material TM-JACKET-## using the following data and components: Data Material Plant BOM usage Components Item category TP-SELF## TP-LINING## TP-LABELM## TP-LABELP## TP-BUTTON## 5-2-1 L (for all components) 1,80 m 1,45 m 1 piece 1 piece 3 pieces Yes

TM-JACKET-## 0001 1 (Production)

The component TP-SELF## has the dimension color with the two value, white and black. Assign the white header material to the white self, and the black to the black. The fabric consumption for sizes 14 and 16 is considerably higher (1.95 m each) than the average consumption and should be taken into consideration. Create deviation quantities for both colors of TP-SELF## accordingly. Green arrow back and proceed to 1-7-2. Component TP-LINING## will only be used for the white garment. Create the zero quantities for this component accordingly. Green arrow back and go on 17-3. Component TP-LABELM## only applies to wholesale garments. Assign category MLABEL- to TP-LABELM##. Green arrow back and go on 1-7-4.
ICP320 2-74

5-2-2

5-2-3
© SAP AG

5-2-4

Component TP-LABELP## is the private label for the retailer. Assign category PLABEL- to TP-LABELP##. Save

5-2-5

Use the level-by-level BOM explosion to check your entries. Test it for several combinations of dimensions and categories. Material BOM application TM-JACKET-## PP01

5-3

Create two quantity distribution profiles PROFILE1-GROUP## and PROFILE2GROUP## 5-3-1 Include the grid with the same structure for header material and component into the first profile (Jacket). For the second profile select the grids with different structures for header material (Jacket) and component (Fabric). Enter factor values by pressing the <Write Header SKU> button. 5-3-2 Create an alternative BOM for your TM-JACKET-##. Enter the different profiles into the BOM and check the calculation of component’s consumption quantities. Save. 5-3-3 Access the check report per quantity distribution profile and analyze the result.

© SAP AG

ICP320

2-75

© SAP AG

ICP320

2-76

Solution
Unit: Topic: AFS Master Data Material and Application Grids

1-1

Create two dimension Ids as characteristic: Cross-Application Components -> Classification System -> Master Data -> Characteristics Create the two dimensions step by step –LMS_## afterwards CLR_##, the values for CLR_## mentioned in brackets • • • • • Enter characteristic ID LMS_## (CLR_##) Press Enter PopUp screen appears: Do You Want to Create the Characteristic? Press YES Enter: o o o o • • • • • • Description: LMS_## Group ## (CLR_## Group ##) characteristic group: /AFS/SAP-D AFS characteristic for dimension data type: CHAR number of characteristic: 2 for LMS (3 for CLR)

Press Tabstrib Values Enter values of characteristic and description Save characteristic Press button Change -> basic screen of characteristic is displayed Press button Relevances -> flag relevancies Save characteristic

Set relevances:

Create the second dimension as characteristic in the same way: CLR_##

© SAP AG

ICP320

2-77

1-2

Create two master grids. Logistic -> AFS Central Functions -> Grids -> Material Grid -> Create 1-2-1 Enter data: Data Mat.grid type Mat.grid no Characteristic 1 Characteristic 2 M MGMII-## LMS_## (XS, S, M, L, XL) CLR_##(Colors)

Select : Create Dimension Values and select values 1-2-2 Create a master grid for jeans with waist, inseam and color, using MGMIII-## as your product grid name Enter data: Data Mat.grid type Mat.grid no Characteristic 1 Characteristic 2 Characteristic 3 M MGMIII-## CLR_## WST (Waist:26-28, Increment 2) INS (Inseam: 26-32, Increment1)

Button: Create dimension value (enter Color), then select all values of WST and INS for all colors.

© SAP AG

ICP320

2-78

Solution
Unit: Topic: AFS Master Data Categories and Coverage Strategy

2-1

Create a category structure 2-1-1 Relevance check: Cross-Application Components -> Classification System -> Master Data -> Characteristics Enter: LAB; Press button Relevance -> check marked flags Check QUA in the same way Label EAN FLC MRP PRC PRI RSC VLC FLC MRP PRC PRI RSC VLC Quality

Note the relevancies of an AFS-characteristic can only be changed, as long as they are not used in any grid or category structure. Create category structure Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project → SAP Reference IMG → Logistics General → AFS Categories → Define Category Structures Press Button Change/Display, then select new entries and create your structure TM##. Maintain the next level Category fields by entering the structure fields LAB, QUA. Save the entries Mark your structure TM## press Button Change/Display and press <Lock structure>.

© SAP AG

ICP320

2-79

2-1-2

Create your coverage strategy in Customizing. IMG: Logistic General → AFS Categories → Define Coverage Strategies Select your category structure and double click Coverage Strategies → Press Button Change/Display, then select new entries. Assign the Coverage Strategy TMCOV-## to your Category Structure TM##. Green Arrow back and save.

2-1-3

Create all valid category combinations at your coverage strategy. Select your coverage strategy and double click Category Combinations. With the F4 –help enter Labels and Quality values. All for each.

2-1-4

Define ARUN/MRP /Stock Allocation To be able to use categories in MRP, you have to maintain the relationship between the stock and requirement categories in Customizing. IMG: Logistic General → AFS Categories → Define Coverage Strategies → Structures→ Coverage strategies → Arun/MRP: Requirement/Stock Allocation. Remember to choose <Change View> in order to maintain new entries for the allocation. Delete the existing default entries. Choose <New entries>. Define following entries: Coverage Strategy Req Category Level 1 1 1 CoNo 1 2 1 Stock Category MLABEL-1MLABEL-2PLABEL-

TMCOV-## MLABELTMCOV-## MLABELTMCOV-## PLABEL2-1-5

Define Dependent Requirements/Stock Transfer Maintain the table to assign the allocation of secondary requirement categories to finished products. IMG: Logistic General → AFS Categories → Define Coverage Strategies → Structures→ Coverage strategies → Dependent Requirements/Stock transfer Delete the existing default entries. Choose <New entries>. Coverage Strategy Stock category Coverage Strategy Requirement category

TMCOV-## *********

TMCOV-## *********

© SAP AG

ICP320

2-80

2-1-6

Define Requirement to Stock Conversion Maintain the sourcing proposal table to define the categories to be produced or procured for your coverage strategy. IMG: Logistic General → AFS Categories → Define Coverage Strategies → Structures→ Coverage strategies → Requirement to Stock Conversion Delete the existing default entries. Choose <New entries>. Coverage Strategy TMCOV-## Requirement Category ********* Stock Category *********

2-1-7

Planned Ind. Requirements Consumption. Maintain the category of the planned independent requirements that sales orders of a certain category are to consume. IMG: Logistic General → AFS Categories → Define Coverage Strategies → Structures→ Coverage strategies → Planned Ind. Requirements Consumption Delete the existing default entries. Choose <New entries>. Coverage Strategy TMCOV-## SO Requirement category ********* Level CoNoEC SO Requirement category 1 #########

1

© SAP AG

ICP320

2-81

© SAP AG

ICP320

2-82

Solution
Unit: Topic: AFS Master Data Material Master

3-1

Create a material master for the trading good TM-TSHIRT-## with reference to TM-TSHIRT. (AFS materials are created in the standard path). Logistics→ Materials Management → Material Master → Material Create → (General) → Immediately 3-1-1 Create Material Data: Material Industry sector Material type Grid Category Structure Coverage Strategy Plant Storage Location Sales organization Distribution channel 3-1-2 TM-TSHIRT-## F (Apparel and Footwear) HAWA (Trading goods) MGMII-## TM## TMCOV-## 0001 0001 0001 01

Carry out a grid report for your master grid MGMII-##. Logistics → Sales and Distribution → AFS Master data → Grid report <Where-Used List for Material Grids>

© SAP AG

ICP320

2-83

© SAP AG

ICP320

2-84

Solution
Optional
Unit: Topic: AFS Master Data Conversion of Dimensions

4-1

Define size conversion. IMG: Logistics-General → AFS Material Grids → Conversion →Define Dimension Value Conversion → Define Conversion Types Choose <New entries>. 4-1-1 4-1-2 Define the name of your conversion type. To make the conversion available to all materials, no entry is necessary but check the set-up in the next table. IMG: Logistics-General → AFS Material Grids → Conversion → Control Conversion Type Determination → Define conversion indicators The relevant entry is blank for the ID type M = material, no conversion ID has been assigned. This entry is valid for all materials. No additional entry is required. 4-1-3 Assign your conversion type GER-##. IMG: Logistics-General → AFS Material Grids → Conversion → Control Conversion Type Determination → Assign Conversion Type Choose <New entries>. Leave all ID-fields blank. Enter Consecutive Number and your Conversion Type only.

© SAP AG

ICP320

2-85

4-1-4

Define the conversion for the dimensions values. Cross-Application Components -> Classification System -> Master Data -> Characteristics • • • • • Enter your Characteristic ID and click the <change> button -> change screen Click the <conversion> button -> change view: define conversion is displayed Cick <New Entries> Enter the data Save DimVal Line entry 34 36 38 40 42 Grid entry 34 36 38 40 42 Conversion Remark Group ## Group ## Group ## Group ## Group ##

Conv. type

GER-## XS GER-## S GER-## M GER-## L GER-## XL 4-1-5

Change the set-up of your material grid to allow for grid value conversion. Set the Flag for Conversion at the 1st Dimension. At the same time check the sizes of your master grid MGMII-## again. Logistics → Sales and Distribution → AFS Master data → Material grid → Change

4-1-6

Check the result of the conversion of dimension values. Logistics → Sales and distribution → Master Data → Products→ Material → Trading goods → Display AFS Basic Data view – tabstrip Additional EANs , Button< Base Values>.

© SAP AG

ICP320

2-86

Solution
Unit: Topic: AFS Master Data Bill of Materials (BOM)

5-1

Create the material master TM-JACKET-## for the jacket with reference to TP-JACKET. Use JACKET as the grid and TP-CS1 as the coverage strategy. Create the following views and check the AFS-specific views for accuracy: Logistics→ Materials Management → Material Master → Material Create (General) → Immediately Be aware to click through every view, you can use Return. 5-1-1 Data Material Industry sector Material type Plant Sales organization Distribution channel TM-JACKET-## F FERT 0001 0001 01

(Apparel and Footwear) (Finished Products) (copy from 0001) (copy from 0001) (copy from 01)

Views Views: click through every view! Basic data 1 / 2 AFS Basic data Master grid: Category structure: Coverage strategy: AFS Status: Sales: Sales organization data 1 Sales: General/plant data AFS sales data Purchasing MRP1-4 AFS MRP AFS Status MRP: Work scheduling General Plant Data/Storage 1 Accounting 1 Yes JACKET CP01 CP-CS1 Yes

© SAP AG

ICP320

2-87

5-2

Create a BOM for your material TM-JACKET-## using the following data and components: Logistics →Production→ Master Data → Bills of Material→ Bill of Material → Material BOM→ Create Data Material Plant BOM usage TM-JACKET-## 0001 1 (Production)

Enter the Item category, Component, Quantity and Unit of measurement. Item category for all components is L Components TP-SELF## TP-LINING## TP-LABELM## TP-LABELP## TP-BUTTON## Save. 5-2-1 Logistics →Production→ Master Data → Bills of Material→ Bill of Material → Material BOM→ Change Enter your Material TM-JACKET-##, mark item 0010 TP-SELF## and press Button [SKU Data].Enter the component quantity like this: for header material grid 6 WHT enter the 1,80m at WHT, for header material grid 6 BLK at BLK and so on. To process further click the arrow to the right to maintain all sizes accordingly. Sizes 14 and 16: enter 1,95m! Press Button [Accept] Green Arrow back and proceed to 1-7-2. 5-2-2 5-2-3 5-2-4 5-2-5 Mark item 0020 TP-LINING## and press [SKU Data], then press Button [Mode]: mark Quantity zero and enter a small ‘x’ for the BLK sizes. Mark item 0030 TP-LABELM## and press Button [Categories]. Flag MLABEL include and press [Accept]. Mark item 0040 TP-LABELP## and press Button [Categories]. Flag PLABEL include and press [Accept]. BOM Explosion: Logistics →Production→ Master Data → Bills of Material→ Evaluations → BOM Explosion → Material BOM → BOM (Multi-Level) Enter your material TM-JACKET-## and BOM application PP01(Production general), execute (F8). When pressing Button [DIM/CAT.] you can scroll the different sizes of your Jacket. Note that there is no Lining for the black Jackets! 1,80 m 1,45 m 1 piece 1 piece 3 pieces

© SAP AG

ICP320

2-88

GROUP##. [Fast data entry]: [Select via dimension]: Color BLK. Mark the line. [New entry]. [Quantity distribution]. product grid number component (Fabric). enter Factors: BLK1. 5-3-1 Logistics →Production→ Master Data → Bills of Material→ AFS Bill of Material → Maintain Quantity Distribution Profile. but Execute. material grid number (Jacket). 3x green arrow back and save. [Factors]. enter the profile PROFILE1-GROUP##. [Change]. [Factors]. material grid number (Jacket). enter the profile PROFILE2-GROUP##. Second Profile: No entry. First Profile: No entry. Accordingly with Color WHT. Mark the line. 5-3-2 5-3-3 Logistics →Production→ Master Data → Bills of Material→ Bill of Material → Material BOM→ Create Logistics →Production→ Master Data → Bills of Material→ AFS Bill of Material → Check Quantity Distribution Profiles © SAP AG ICP320 2-89 .5-3 Create two quantity distribution profiles PROFILE1-GROUP## and PROFILE2. [New Entry]. [New Entry]. [Change]. but Execute. [Write Header SKUs]: its automatically 1. product grid number component (Jacket).

© SAP AG ICP320 2-90 .

Procurement: Course Content Preface Unit 1 Unit 2 Unit 3 Unit 4 Unit 5 Unit 6 Unit 7 Unit 8 Unit 9 Unit 10 Course Overview Master Data Procurement Inventory Management Invoice Verification Special Business Processes Product Forecasting Planning MRP Production Conclusion Appendices © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 3-1 .

Procurement Contents: Purchasing Process with SKU Data Master Data in Materials Management Purchasing © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 3-2 .

Procurement: Unit Objectives After completing this unit. you will be able to: Outline the process flow associated with external supply Work with the AFS master data in materials management Create & process purchasing documents for AFS materials © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 3-3 .

Procurement: Course Overview Diagram AFS Master Data Material Grids Categories Material Master Customer Master Vendor Master Bill of Materials Pricing Value Added Services Seasons Sales and Distribution Sales MRP Procurement Allocation Run Delivery Billing Sales Information System Procurement Purchase Source Purchase Requisition Allocation Order Warehouse Management Production SOP MRP Markers Valuation/ Production Production Product Order Lots Costing Goods Receipt Routing Planned Order Invoice Verification AFS specific functionality ERP Standard functionality with AFS enhancements © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 3-4 .

© SAP AG ICP320 3-5 . You can maintain the grid values and categories in these documents.Purchasing Process with SKU Data Purchase Planning Requirement Material Master Info Record Vendor Master Conditions MRP Requisition Source Determination Vendor Selection RFQ Quotation Multi-Level Contract Order Processing Purchase Order Purchase Follow Up Shipping Notification Goods Receipt Invoice Verification Material Document Payment Invoice © SAP AG 2008 The typical procurement cycle for a service or material consists of the following phases: Determination of Requirements Source Determination Vendor Selection and Comparison of Quotations Purchase Order Processing Purchase Order Follow-Up Goods Receipt and Inventory Management Invoice Verification The purchasing documents are supported for AFS materials.

Topic: Master Data in Materials Management (MM) Topic Contents: Material Master Vendor Master Purchasing Info Record Conditions Purchase Grids and Grid Determination Distribution Profiles © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 3-6 .

Master Data Materials Management (MM): Topic Objectives After completing this topic. you will be able to: Name the AFS specific data in the material master. vendor master and purchasing information (info) record Create Conditions at SKU level Create a purchase grid Describe the grid determination procedure Set up grid determination in Customizing Describe Distribution Profiles © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 3-7 .

AFS Views Basic Data AFS Basic Data Materials Planning (MRP) AFS MRP Stock Quantities Accounting Storage Warehouse Management AFS Warehouse Management © SAP AG 2008 Purchasing Sales AFS Sales Data Material Master Data Work Scheduling Quality Management Forecasting Classifications AFS Views ERP Standard Views AFS Valuation The material master contains views for each department. These views contain data that is relevant to each department.Material Master . © SAP AG ICP320 3-8 .

Material Master . © SAP AG ICP320 3-9 .g.AFS Enhancements Material master data Material Edit Goto Environment System Help AFS Basic Data Master Grid Grid Control Data Indicator: AFS Status Presizing Information Seasons Information Purchasing Default purchase organization AFS MRP Additional Data Coverage strategy Indicator: AFS Status MRP Plant Level Presizing SKU Level (e. Safety Stock) AFS Valuation Valuation Data on SKU Level © SAP AG 2008 The Purchasing view of the standard ERP material master has been enhanced with the data of the default purchase organization.

For AFS vendors the Schema Group Vendor used is J1 (used to determine the AFS .Vendor Master Purchasing Data (with AFS Additional Data) General Data Vendor Master Accounting Data © SAP AG 2008 The vendor master includes all data necessary for processing business transactions and corresponding with vendors. Information is shared between the accounting and purchasing departments.specific price calculation scheme J_ 3A00) © SAP AG ICP320 3-10 . Data is grouped into three categories: General data Accounting data Purchasing data (with AFS additional data) Vendor master records must be created before procurement can begin.

© SAP AG ICP320 3-11 .AFS Additional Data Display Vendor: Purchasing Vendor Purchasing Organization Vendor ID SC_VENDOR1 Shoe Company 1 0001 KN © SAP AG 2008 The vendor ID is one of the keys to defining a conversion type for the master grid conversion (for details see chapter “AFS Master Data“).Vendor Master .

purchase orders. It holds information for a specific material and vendor combination. Information records can be displayed individually. tolerance limits) Information from the last purchase order and quotation Vendor data Data maintained in the information records appears as default values during the creation of purchasing documents (for example. contracts). © SAP AG ICP320 3-12 . request for quotation or quote. delivery lead time. provided that the information update indicator in these documents is activated. The information record can be updated automatically from a purchase order.Purchasing Info Record Vendor Data Delivery Data Purchasing Info Record Pricing © SAP AG 2008 Purchasing information records describe the supply relationship of a material and a vendor. or by material group. The purchasing info record is a part of the master data for purchasing. Information records allow the definition and maintenance of: Current and future prices and pricing conditions (for example. discounts) Delivery data (for example. by vendor. freight. by material.

Purchasing Info Record . In the Overview AFS Additional Data screen.AFS Additional Data (1) Minimum Quantity Maximum Quantity Under-delivery Over-delivery Tolerance Tolerance Size Grid Value Color Category BLU Grid Value & Category 44 x 46 48 50 RED GRN UCC/EAN/ UPC Number Rounding Factor Info Record Note Purchase Order Text © SAP AG 2008 The purchasing info record has been enhanced with two additional AFS screens. control data and texts can be maintained with the following levels: Category and grid value dependent Grid value dependent Category dependent © SAP AG ICP320 3-13 .

The rounding method which is used to round SKU-quantities in purchasing documents. the following data can be maintained on material level: Planned delivery times which are used to determine the delivery date in the purchase order.AFS Additional Data (2) Planned Delivery Lead Times: Replenishment Lead Time Manufacturing Lead Time Packing Lead Time Transportation Lead Time Capacity Offset Lead Time Round Convert: round not : round up round down round nearest Route Determination: Transport Zone Subcontracting: Subcontracting Indicator Transport Group Transport Condition © SAP AG 2008 In the AFS Additional Data screen. You can indicate that the material is normally subcontracted by the vendor. The standard SD Route Determination has been included in the AFS procurement process. A warning will be displayed when you purchase this article using an item category other then L (subcontracting). © SAP AG ICP320 3-14 .Purchasing Info Record .

The transportation lead time specifies the lead time to transport the material from your vendor to your plant.Purchasing Info Record . © SAP AG ICP320 3-15 .AFS Additional Data (3) Planned Delivery Lead Times Purchase Order Creation Date Planned Replenishment Lead Time Final Final Ex Factory Determination Destination Date Date Date Delivery Date Time Replenishment Manufacturing Lead Time Lead Time for Raw Material Prepping/ Packing Lead Time Transportation Lead Time © SAP AG 2008 The replenishment lead times specify the lead time of the vendor to procure the raw material. The manufacturing lead time specifies the production time of the vendor. The packing lead time specifies the lead time needed by the vendor to prepare the material for transshipment.

you can create pricing conditions at SKU level. For example: Material info record with grid value & category (plant-specific) Material info record with grid value & category Material info record with grid value Material info record with price group Material info record with category (plant-specific) Material info record with category © SAP AG ICP320 3-16 .AFS levels PRICING Condition Technique Possible Levels: Grid Value Grid Value and Category Price Groups Category © SAP AG 2008 With the condition technique.Pricing . The conditions at SKU level are not maintained in the info record itself. but are created using Master data -> Conditions -> Other. You can maintain pricing conditions at different levels.

The regular procurement price (J3AP) is the base price of a product. Price Polo Shirt 5 Price Group 1 Price Group 2 Valid for all Grid Values © SAP AG 2008 There are several types of prices in AFS that can also operate at the grid value and category level.AFS Condition Types (1) Condition Type J3AP (Regular Procurement Price) Price at Grid Value Level Material Gr.Pricing . Price Polo Shirt S M L XL 4 5 6 6.V.V.V. It can be maintained for different key combinations at SKU level.50 Price at Price Group Material Gr. Price Polo Shirt S M L XL 4 4 5 5 Price at Material Level Material Gr. © SAP AG ICP320 3-17 .

AFS Condition Types (2) Quotation Purchase Order CONDITIONS Code Description J3AX Gross Price + DIM J3AP Gross Price + DIM J3AD Discount on Gross Amount $10. purchase orders and contracts) J3AD: Discount on gross price at SKU level © SAP AG ICP320 3-18 .00 3% Outline Agreement Info Records © SAP AG 2008 AFS condition types: J3AP: Gross price at SKU level J3AX: Gross price at SKU level (for manual creation of pricing in quotations.00 $10.Pricing .

within purchase orders. This enables greater control over dimensions in Materials Management (MM) related areas. to a material. via a condition technique. Material E542 Purchase Grid Shirt-XL XXL © SAP AG 2008 A purchase grid is a subset of a master grid restricting dimensions in the procurement process. not all dimensions of a master grid can be produced by a certain vendor. and so on.... 3000 Valid from … to . For example.Purchase Grids Master Grid Size XS S Color BLK BLU RED M L XL XXL Purchase Grid Size XS S Color BLK BLU RED Condition Record M L XL XXL Vendor ………. material/vendor master grid. for example. Purchase grids can be linked.. © SAP AG ICP320 3-19 .

The additional material number is used as an additional number to identify the material. You can also maintain the rounding factor in the info record. to use the additional number of the grid cell control data. You can also maintain this additional number in the info record. The additional number is automatically copied to the purchase order. You can use price groups to assign specific grid values to a group with the same price. The rounding factor is used for rounding of the SKU quantities in the purchasing documents. No.Grid Cell Control Data UCC/EAN/ UPC Number Rounding Factor Size Color BLU RED GRN 44 x 46 48 50 Price group © SAP AG 2008 You can also maintain an additional number. The quantity will be rounded to a multiple of the rounding factor. © SAP AG ICP320 3-20 . the Use ROF indicator in the info record has to be set.Purchase Grids . be sure that the indicator in the info record is not set. To use the rounding factor of the grid cell control data. indicator. you have to set the Use Add. To use the rounding factor of the info record. a rounding factor and a price group for the grid values. To use the additional number in the info record. this indicator has to be removed.

Grid Levels Purchase grids can be determined.material: Plant . for example. at the following levels (default key combinations): Key Combination Purchasing organization .master grid: Purchasing organization .material: Purchasing organization . © SAP AG ICP320 3-21 .Purchase Grid .vendor .material: Material: Condition Table KOTJ102 KOTJ121 KOTJ111 KOTJ101 KOTJ2 © SAP AG 2008 You can set up your own key combinations (levels) by defining your own condition tables.

and which order the system searches for valid condition records. the system looks for relevant condition types (PGRD) in the grid determination procedure (MM0001). Each condition type (PGRD) is linked to an access sequence (PGRD). The first found valid entry in a condition table contains the purchase grid that will be used for the purchase order. © SAP AG ICP320 3-22 . When a purchase order is created.Determination (1) Grid Determination Procedure: MM0001 Condition Type: 2 Purchase Order: 1 PGRD PGRD PGRD PGRD Condition Type: Access Sequence: 3 Vendor: A1000 Purchase Organization: 1000 Material: 5520 Purchase Grid: L RED WHT XL XXL Access Sequence: 1. Table 102 3. Table 111 Table 102: + Grid Cell Control Data 4 5 Purchase Organization-Vendor-Material Field Catalog: Purchase Organization: Vendor: Material: © SAP AG 2008 EKORG LIFNR MATNR For menu paths. For each condition table. You can maintain a validity period for this link. Table 101 2.Purchase Grids . The access sequence (PGRD) determines in which condition tables. It is possible to use different access sequences for purchase orders and purchase requisitions. the system searches for a valid condition record using the key information entered in the purchase order. see Appendix.

Purchase grid determination can be switched off for purchase requisitions.either the valid grid on the creation date. To use the outline agreement correction functionality you have to run an additional report (J_3ACROR). see: IMG: Materials Management -> Purchasing -> AFS Grid Determination (Purchasing Grids) © SAP AG ICP320 3-23 . When creating a contract. .Purchase Grid . 4.Determination (2) Purchasing Requisition PR grid determination act PR delivery date indicator Purchasing order PO delivery date indicator 2 RFQ/quotation RFQ delivery date 2 1 2 Contracts Contract date indicator 3 Contract end date Use Mastergrid Outline agreement corr. purchase order and request for quotation. the delivered quantity will be consumed as the target quantity in the contract instead of the ordered quantity.you can choose to use . When using the purchase grid. 2. For menu paths. 4 © SAP AG 2008 Customizing possibilities: 1. If this indicator is set. the system will use either the purchase grid or the master grid. 3.or the valid grid on the delivery date. For a purchase requisition. the system checks whether the agreement date or the end date of the contract lies within the validity period of the purchase grid.

The distribution profile can be maintained as material-based or material-independent.Distribution Profile (1) SOP/Flexible Planning Transfer to Demand Management External System SIS Planned Independent Requirements Sales Order RFQ Mapping Distribution Profiles Manual Entry of Ratios Multi-Level Contract Purchase Requisition Purchase Order © SAP AG 2008 Distribution profile versions can be maintained to predefine a spread profile for the dimensions/categories of an AFS material. The latter has to be assigned to the material master (AFS basic data view). © SAP AG ICP320 3-24 . The distribution profile can be used in following purchasing documents: purchase requisitions request for quotations purchase orders contracts.

Distribution Profile (2) Distribution: Examples for Grid Values Total Quantity: 1800 pieces S 1 16.3% 33. the system allocates this accordingly and spreads the entered weight over the grid values/categories in purchase requisitions.7% 600 600 Presizing 300 Item details Delivery schedule © SAP AG 2008 If the material has been given a distribution profile at the grid value/category level. Distribution profiles can be determined on the following levels: Plant Category Grid value Period You can generate a distribution profile with information stored in the SIS (Information Structure S430) © SAP AG ICP320 3-25 .7% 300 M 2 L 2 XL 1 Create Purchase Order Header Item overview 33.3% 16. purchase orders etc.

Master Data Materials Management (MM): Topic Summary You should now be able to: Name the AFS specific data in the material master. vendor master and purchasing information (info) record Create Conditions at SKU level Create a purchase grid Describe the grid determination procedure Set up grid determination in Customizing Describe Distribution Profiles © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 3-26 .

Topic: Purchasing Topic Contents: Multi-Level Contract Purchase Requisition Purchase Order Inbound Delivery © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 3-27 .

you will be able to: Create multilevel contracts Create a purchase requisition for AFS materials Create a purchase order for AFS materials Describe AFS Route Determination Post an inbound delivery © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 3-28 .Purchasing: Topic Objectives At the conclusion of this topic.

Purchasing Process Material Master Requisition MRP Reason Code Source Determination Order Processing Purchase Order Multi-Level Contract Grid Determination Rounding Presizing Vendor Master Info Record Conditions Shipping Notification Purchase Follow Up Goods Receipt Material Document Invoice Invoice Verification © SAP AG 2008 The SAP ERP system has been enhanced with AFS functionalities for the purchasing process: Reason code Grid determination Rounding Presizing © SAP AG ICP320 3-29 .

Multi-Level Contract Material Master Multi-Level Contract Vendor Master Purchase Requisition Info Record Conditions Vendor Selection Order Processing Purchase Order Shipping Notification Purchase Follow Up Goods Receipt Material Document © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 3-30 .

Note: Create contracts for different levels in different planning periods.December 1st Level 2 Material A Quantity: 7000 pieces July 1st . These contracts are dependent on each other. Call offs are always performed on the contract of the lowest level. For the first level contract enter the agreement type AFSK. © SAP AG ICP320 3-31 . You can use the multi-level contracts for a sophisticated planning organization between your company and your vendor. For the other levels use agreement type MK (quantity contract) or WK (value contract).Logistic Background Production Planning Procurement of Raw Material Rough Planning Detailed Planning Level 3 Material A-Grid Value:38L Quantity: 1500 pieces July 1st .August 1st Vendor Manufacturing Call Off Validity Period of Level 3 Contract Validity Period of Level 2 Contract Validity Period of Level 1 Contract Level 1 Target Quantity: 100000 pieces Material Group: T-Shirts Material A Material B Validity Period: July 1st .September 1st December January April July Creation Date October © SAP AG 2008 In AFS. you can maintain multi-level contracts at SKU level.Multi-Level Contracts .

Purchase Order .Overview Material Master Vendor Master Purchase Requisition Info Record Conditions Prices at SKU Level Tolerances at SKU Grid Determination Vendor Selection Order Processing Purchase Order Rounding Presizing Route Determination Shipping Notification Purchase Follow Up Goods Receipt Material Document © SAP AG 2008 Purchase orders can be used in various procurement processes. © SAP AG ICP320 3-32 . SKU quantities can either be entered manually or an automatic distribution profile can be applied. Purchase orders identify items such as: Vendor Material and quantity ordered Price and terms Delivery date and location Purchase orders can be created without reference to a purchase requisition. Purchase orders have been enhanced to support the grid and category values on SKU level.

Purchasing Documents . reference document data. For the purchase order the rounding value can be set in the grid cell control data or in the info record. The UCC. New Delivery Date: Several schedule lines can be selected for the assignment of a new delivery date. Rounding: The SKU can be rounded to a multiple of the rounding value using the <Rounding> button. © SAP AG ICP320 3-33 . provided that you have created the profile. issued quantity and delivered quantity are also displayed.Item details Detailed information to every SKU New Delivery Date Stock Categories Grid Entry Create Purchase Order Header Item overview Rounding Item details Delivery schedule Add Text Presizing © SAP AG 2008 Detail: Using the <Detail> button the item details are displayed. EAN/UPC code. you can change the stock category of all the SKUs of an item. Presizing: To calculate the quantities over a certain distribution profile you can use the <Presizing> button. Text: Using the <Text> button you can maintain additional text for each SKU. Tolerance data and the ex factory date are displayed for each SKU. Grid Entry: Input of grid values via grid entry screen Category: Using the <Category> button. the received quantity.

Item Details – Delivery Schedule: In the item details. For maintaining grid values you can copy and delete a row or column. In grid entry there are features which support the maintenance of the grid value quantities. the schedule line data is displayed in the item details. quantities on SKU level can directly be entered. The determined grid can be displayed by selecting an item and pressing the button Grid Determination Log. © SAP AG ICP320 3-34 .Purchasing Documents . You can change the SKU category by using the <Category> button or maintaining it in the item detail overview. it is possible to maintain data at SKU level. By double clicking on the quantity of the item in the item overview. You can rotate the grid using the rotate function. You can enter the quantities in the grid entry display mode. the grid entry screen is displayed. Using the SKU data button.Screen Layout Create Purchase Order Header Item overview Item details Delivery schedule SKU Data © SAP AG 2008 In ERP purchasing documents.

when you set the rounding factor to 5. In this screen you can maintain the rounding method. You can activate the rounding manually by clicking the <Rounding> button in the purchasing documents. will automatically be defaulted. … and so on. The rounding method can be adjusted manually. it is possible to round SKUs to certain values. In the grid cell control data or in the info record you can define a multiple of the rounding value. is to calculate the difference in case of rounding up. 10. For example. RFQ. This means that the rounding factor for the SKU has to be defined. The rounding methods are rounding to the nearest multiple of the rounding factor. When both differences are equal the system will round down. The logic for rounding to the nearest multiple of the rounding factor. 20. to calculate the difference in case of rounding down. Using the <Round values> button in the SKU data screen in the purchase document a rounding dialog screen is displayed. The rounding can be used in the PR.Purchase Order . set in Customizing. 15. To use the rounding factor in the info record you also have to set the 'use ROF' flag in the info record. and round to the value with the smallest difference. The rounding method. By converting a purchase requisition in a purchase order the rounding method set in the info record will be used. the quantities will be rounded to 5. © SAP AG ICP320 3-35 . round up or down or no quantity changes will be made. round the values using the <Simulate> button and see the result at SKU level using the <Protocol> button.Rounding # in box S S S S ROF 8 6 4 S M L 8 6 4 Create Purchase Order L L Header Item overview Round values Item details Delivery schedule © SAP AG 2008 In AFS. PO and contract.

you can use the standard ERP System rounding procedure on item level (rounding profile and unit of measure group). If the flag Use ROF is set. Alternatively. down. It is possible to set a default rounding method (round not. the system uses the factor of the info record. nearest) in Customizing. The rounding factor can be set in both the purchase grid and the info record. For menu paths. see Appendix.Rounding SKU or Item Level SKU-level Inforecord 10 Item-level Inforecord PAL1 Rounding Factor Use ROF Rounding Profile Unit of Measure Group OR EXT5 Purchase Grid (Grid cell control MM) Customizing Rounding Profile PAL Plant 100001 10 Vendor Size Rounding Factor 1 Threshhold Value 10 Round Value © SAP AG 2008 The rounding factor is used for rounding SKU quantities in purchasing documents. © SAP AG ICP320 3-36 .Purchase Order . up.

Purchase Order . it is done by truck. For these shipping conditions another route and transportation time is determined. For example. when the goods are normally transported. Plant 0001 Create Purchase Order Header Delivery Time: 3 Days Pack for Transport by Truck Item overview Item details Delivery schedule © SAP AG 2008 The transportation lead time for a route from your vendor to your plant can be determined in route determination. © SAP AG ICP320 3-37 . The transportation lead time for a route is determined and can be recalculated according to different shipping conditions. By forward calculation the delivery date is recalculated. For the determination of the route. By backward calculation the delivery date is fixed and the production date. This function uses parts of ERP Standard route determination in sales and distribution. shipping condition and transport group are taken into account. the goods can be transported by plane. The (re)determination of the route can de done by forward and backward calculation. which determines the route from your plant to your customer. but when the goods are urgently needed.Route Determination in AFS (1) Delivery Time: 18 Days Pack for Transport by Ship Plant 0002 Vendor Route determ. the zones of your vendor and your plant. packing date and ex factory date are recalculated.

Purchase Order . © SAP AG ICP320 3-38 . Maintain transportation from your vendor‘s transportation zone to your plant‘s goods receipt zone. Steps in Customizing: 1. for example on pallets (SD Standard Customizing). see Appendix.Define transportation groups. This means that planned delivery lead time is dependent upon the determined route.Maintain transportation route with transit time and transportation lead time (AFS Customizing). 7. 5. For menu paths. It determines the itinerary and mode of transport from the country of origin to the destination country. The route may depend upon the transportation group and the shipping conditions (AFS Customizing).Define transport zones for each country that is involved (SD Standard Customizing). and can lead to a new delivery date being calculated. 6.Maintain transportation zone. 3. transportation group and shipping conditions in your purchasing info records (AFS Additional Data).Route Determination in AFS (2) Country of Origin: US Vendor XYZ Inforecord Vendor: XYZ Plant: ABC Material: Ladies Shoes ‚Cynthia‘ Transport Zone: 001 East Coast Transport Group:001 on pallets Transport Cond: 001 standard Route: 007 Transatlantic Shipment Transit Time: 5 Days Transportation Time: 20 Days Plant: ABC Country of Destination: DE Transportation Goods Receipt Zone: 0002 © SAP AG 2008 You can carry out AFS MM route determination for a purchase order. 4. 2.Define transportation goods receipt zone (AFS Customizing). for example standard (SD Standard Customizing).Define shipping conditions.

The transportation lead time is the number of days required to arrange transportation for an item that one country plans to deliver using a particular route. the shipping condition for the delivery of goods. and the transportation route. Enter the transportation route from the country of origin to the destination country for the combinations of the departure zone. see Appendix.Route Determination in AFS (3) Define and assign transportation zones (SD Customizing) AFS Maintain transportation goods receipt zone 2 1 AFS Maintain transportation route 3 AFS Maintain transportation from country to country 4 Maintain relevant data in the purchasing info record Route determination in purchase order © SAP AG 2008 AFS MM route determination can be carried out automatically by the system for a purchase order. Step 1: AFS Maintain Transportation Goods Receipt Zone Assign a plant to the destination country and define the transport zone to which the goods are delivered (goods receipt zone). Step 3: AFS Maintain Transportation from Country to Country AFS MM route determination from country to country is carried out according to the same criteria as route determination in sales documents. For menu paths.Purchase Order . You should check which actual route should be proposed in each delivery. using a particular route. © SAP AG ICP320 3-39 . It determines the itinerary and mode of transport from the country of origin to the destination country. Step 2: AFS Maintain Transportation Route Define the transit time and the transportation lead time (in days) for each transportation route. the transport zone to which the goods are delivered. The transit time from goods issue to ship-to party in days is the number of days required to deliver an item from one country to another.

00 Net Value 13.07.Purchase Order .2000 © SAP AG 2008 A new form for AFS purchase orders has been created: J_3A_MEDRUCK.2000 05.07.Message Purchase Order Item.07.2000 03.07.2000 07.00 Total Quantity Split: Grid Value 6 BLUE 6 RED 7 RED 8 RED Qty 25 25 25 25 Unit PAA PAA PAA PAA Delivery Date 01. Material Quantity 00010 100 Unit SHOE-01 PAA Description Price per Unit LADIES SHOES „ANITA“ 130. © SAP AG ICP320 3-40 .000.

e. plant. It can be enhanced with BAdI methods. item category Change additional customer fields on item/ schedule line level Benefits Fast and efficient change of purchase orders Optimization of purchase order handling Increase ease of use © SAP AG ICP320 3-41 .g.Purchase Order Split © SAP AG 2008 With AFS 5. The transaction allows you to Implement own authority checks Split PO based on header data. vendor. purchasing organization Split PO based on item level data.0 release the new transaction ‘Split & Change PO’ /AFS/SPLITPO is delivered. e.g.

the vendor provides increasingly reliable data on the anticipated delivery.Overview Requisition Source Determination Order Processing Purchase Order Shipping Notification Purchase Follow Up Goods Receipt Material Document © SAP AG 2008 Inbound deliveries are order fulfillment confirmations for purchase orders. incoming shipping notifications can be received via EDI and entered as inbound deliveries in your system automatically.Inbound Delivery . Inbound deliveries allow the customer to plan ahead more precisely. If you have an EDI arrangement with your vendor. since during the period between purchase order date and the desired delivery date. © SAP AG ICP320 3-42 .

the data is automatically updated in the purchase order. Quantity Availability Date L L © SAP AG 2008 38L 38L 40 60 May 1 May 3 Inbound deliveries have been extended to support grid and category values on SKU level.Inbound Delivery r nd o Ve Purchase Department Purchase Order Material A Grid Value: 38L Quantity: 100 pieces ConfContrK: 0001 Purchase Order Material A Grid Value: 38L Quantity: 100 pieces Delivery Date: May 1st Shipping Notification May 1st: 40 pieces May 3rd: 60 pieces Mail EDI Inbound Deliveries May 1st: 40 pieces May 3rd: Confirmation Overview 60 pieces 38L 40 pieces May 1st 38L 60 pieces May 3rd Goods Receipt MRP Stock Type Gr. © SAP AG ICP320 3-43 .V. If you generate an inbound delivery with its own inbound delivery document.

Report for PO Confirmation © SAP AG 2008 With AFS 5. © SAP AG ICP320 3-44 .0 release the new report ‘for Purchase Order Confirmation’ is available (/AFS/ME2A).

. use the user exit to change the spread back to the original order quantity. © SAP AG 2008 User exit Presizing allows you to change the spread quantities in retrospect.User Exit Examples Function Module EXIT_SAPMJ3AL_001 Enhancement Description Presizing /AFS/MM1 EXIT_SAPLJAP_004 /AFS/MMC Category Determination ……….Purchase Order . This can simplify purchase order handling. ……….. if the presizing functionality increases the quantity you originally wanted to order. User exit Category Determination allows you to fill the category field when creating or changing a purchase order. With the transaction SMOD you can check the enhancements © SAP AG ICP320 3-45 .. For example. ……….

Procurement: Unit Summary You should now be able to: Outline the process flow associated with external supply Work with the AFS master data in materials management Create & process purchasing documents for AFS materials © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 3-46 .

Purchasing Info Record and Conditions At the conclusion of this exercise. Which colors are valid for your material TM-SHIRT## ? ____________________ In the AFS basic data view. 1-2 Maintain the AFS data in the vendor master of your vendors TM-SUPPA## and TMSUPPB## for purchase organization 0001. you will be able to: • • • • Set up the AFS data in the material master Set up the AFS data in the vendor master Set up the AFS data in the info record Maintain prices at SKU level Your company GLOBAL FASHION can order material TM-SHIRT## from the two vendors TM-SUPPA## and TM-SUPPB##. The purchasing info records contain information on your material and your vendors. The schema group determines. which calculation schema is to be used in purchasing documents containing this vendor number. vendor J1 (AFS schema vendor). 1-1 Maintain the AFS data in the material master for your material TM-SHIRT## in plant 0001: 1-1-1 1-1-2 1-1-3 In the AFS basic data view. Which calculation schema will be determined for schema group J1 (check Customizing)? Calculation Schema: ______________________________ © SAP AG ICP320 3-47 . 1-2-1 1-2-2 In the Purchasing data view. The vendors have different prices for the material at dimension level. Vendor Master. the coverage strategy is displayed.Exercise Unit: Topic: AFS Procurement Material Master. Which categories are valid for your material TM-SHIRT## ? _________________ In the Purchasing view. set the purchase organization to 0001. check the schema group. the master grid is defined.

The lead times for replenishment. 1-3-2 1-3-3 1-4 The vendor TM-SUPPA## has different prices for the material TM-SHIRT## at dimension level. Do not forget to flag the Use Additional Number indicator in the info record. Which planned delivery time is calculated by the system? Data Replenishment lead time 10 Manufacturing lead time 15 Prepare packing lead time 1 Transportation lead time 10 Planned delivery time:____________________________________ Enter the confirmation control key 0005 in the info records. Whenever we order T-Shirts with the size XL we want to order the normal XL. that is.1-3 Maintain the AFS data in the info record of your vendor TM-SUPPA##: Data Vendor Material: Purchasing Organization: Plant 1-3-1 TM-SUPPA## TM-SHIRT## 0001 0001 For size XL the vendor TM-SUPPA## delivers the versions normal and extended. smaller sizes are cheaper than larger sizes. Maintain the following prices for the different sizes for all colors: XS Prices ($) 25 S 25 M 28 L 30 XL 30 © SAP AG ICP320 3-48 . manufacturing. Therefore we maintain NORMAL as a vendor additional number for all SKUs with the dimension value XL. Data Vendor Material Purchasing Organization 1-4-1 TM-SUPPA## TM-SHIRT## 0001 Create an AFS condition record for the AFS condition type J3AP with the key combination material info record with grid value. Save your changes in the purchasing info record. transportation and prepare packing are maintained on the AFS additional data screen.

In the grid cell control data you maintain the price groups for the grid values. This profile is then determined in the purchase order and the quantity entered is automatically distributed as determined in the distribution profile.Exercise Unit: Topic: AFS Procurement Purchase Grid. You can create purchase grids with different key combinations in the AFS Applications (grid control data MM). Presizing. Therefore. Create a distribution profile for your material TM-SHIRT##. Therefore you create a purchase grid to restrict some grid values. In the grid cell control data you maintain the price groups for the grid values. you create a purchase grid to restrict some grid values. 2-1 Vendor TM-SUPPA## cannot deliver the color yellow. as you mostly use the same grid value distribution when ordering this material. 2-1-1 Create a purchase grid with the key combination purchasing organizationvendor-material. Rounding At the conclusion of this exercise. Data Purchase grid number Vendor Purchasing organization Material XS Yellow Red Blue S PGRD-A## TM-SUPPA## 0001 TM-SHIRT## M L XL © SAP AG ICP320 3-49 . you will be able to: • • • Create a purchase grid and maintain the grid cell control data Create and maintain a distribution profile and use the presizing functionality Use the rounding functionality Your vendor TM-SUPPA## cannot deliver the color yellow. Then round the purchasing amounts at SKU level as wished by your vendor.

2-2-1 Create a purchase grid with the key combination purchase organizationvendor-material. Data Purchase grid number Vendor Purchasing organization Material XS Blue Red Yellow 2-2-2 Assign the grid values of your material TM-SHIRT## to the above mentioned price groups. Use the mode Grid value group for Price determination and key in the following assignments: Price group 01 (small): all grid values with sizes XS and S Price group 02 (medium): all grid values with sizes M and L Price group 03 (large): all grid values with size XL 2-2-3 Create an AFS condition record for the AFS condition type J3AP with the key combination Material Info Record with Grid Value Group. Therefore. Maintain the following prices for the different price groups.2-2 Vendor TM-SUPPB## has different prices for material TM-SHIRT## at dimension level. medium = 02. Data Vendor Material Purchasing Organization Info Record Category Price per piece: Vendor TM-SUPPB## Size Group 01 28 USD Size Group 02 Size Group 03 30 USD 32 USD TM-SUPPB## TM-SHIRT## 0001 0 (Standard) S PGRD-B## TM-SUPPB## 0001 TM-SHIRT## M L XL © SAP AG ICP320 3-50 . three price groups have been created in Customizing: (small = 01. large = 03). You can do this in the grid control data of your purchase grid PGRD-B##.

Data Vendor Material Purchasing Organization Plant XS Blue Red Yellow 5 5 5 S 5 5 5 TM-SUPPB## TM-SHIRT## 0001 0001 M 10 10 10 L 10 10 10 XL 10 10 10 © SAP AG ICP320 3-51 . you have to maintain a rounding factor for all SKUs in the purchasing information record (at grid value level). Press the <Copy Grid Value> button and select all grid values. use the fast entry mode to maintain the rounding factor for all SKUs. Data Plant Category Validity period Version XS Blue Red Yellow 6 2 S 6 2 M 24 8 0001 * (all) * (all) 00 L 24 8 XL 15 5 2-4 Optional: Use the rounding functionality to round the grid values. After that. Therefore.2-3 Optional: Create a distribution profile for your material TM-SHIRT## on grid value level. 2-4-1 Your vendor TM-SUPPB## always delivers T-shirts in multiples of 5 for the small and multiples of 10 for the medium and large sizes. Do not forget to set the Use ROF indicator. Set the default rounding method to Round up.

presizing functionality and the rounding functionality. Use the rounding functionality.2-5 Optional: Create a purchase order with the following data to check the prices. Data Vendor: Purchasing Organization: Purchasing Group Plant: Date: Material: Quantity: 2-5-1 2-5-2 TM-SUPPB## 0001 001 0001 Today’s Date + 2 Month TM-SHIRT## 250 Use the presizing functionality to determine the quantities at SKU level. Which quantities of the grid values are calculated by the system? XS Blue Red Yellow S M L XL 2-5-3 Check the prices at SKU level. © SAP AG ICP320 3-52 . Round to the nearest.

TM-SHIRT## will be a member of that material group. Data Vendor Agreement type Purchasing Organization Purchasing Group Item category Plant Storage Location Validity Start Validity End Material group Short Text Target quantity Order unit Net price TM-SUPPB## FSK 0001 001 M (Material unknown) 0001 WM01 Today’s date Today’s date + 3 months 01 (Basic)) Basic 1000 PC 30 USD Mark the item. Maintain the following data and enter a short text. You refer to the quantity contract in your purchase order. Contract number: ________________________ © SAP AG ICP320 3-53 . Save your contract and make a note of the contract number. 3-1 Create an AFS first level and a second level contract: 3-1-1 Create an AFS first level contract (AFSK) for the material group BASIC (01). A net price of 30 USD (which is an assumed average price) was agreed for the material group. The quantity contract is valid for two months starting today. you will be able to: • • Create an AFS first-level and second-level contract Create a purchase order with reference to the second-level contract Our GLOBAL FASHION company wants to book capacity at TMSUPPB## for the material group BASIC within the next three months. Material TM-SHIRT## with its grid values and AFS pricing conditions is specified in a quantity contract of 600 pieces that refers to the firstlevel contract. and use the <AFS Additional data> button to enter your material TM-SHIRT## with a net price of 26 USD. The price of material TM-SHIRT## is 26 USD.Exercise Unit: Topic: AFS Procurement Multi Level Contract At the conclusion of this exercise.

Data Agreement type Purchasing Organization Purchasing Group Item Category Plant Storage Location Validity Start Validity End Material Quantity Grid Value MK 0001 001 blank 0001 0001 Today’s date Today’s date + 2 months TM-SHIRT## 600 Stock Category Quantity Σ Save your contract and make a note of the contract number.3-1-2 Create a quantity contract of 600 pieces for the material TM-SHIRT## with reference to the first level contract. Make a note of the purchase order number: _______________________ 3-1-5 Check the open target quantity in the second level contract. Grid Value Stock Category Open Target Quantity Check the released quantity in the first level contract: Released quantity: ________________________________ © SAP AG ICP320 3-54 . Contract number: _________________________ 3-1-3 Check the open target quantities in the second level contract. Released quantity: ________________________ 3-1-4 Create a purchase order with reference to the second level contract and enter the Grid values by using the compare function (press the <Compare> button and process the F4-help on the field grid value). Distribute the quantity to two or three different grid values. Grid Value Stock Category 600 Open Target Quantity Check the released quantity in the first level contract.

you will be able to: • Create a purchase requisition with AFS material Create a purchase requisition to plan how much material to procure externally. 4-1 Create a purchase requisition for your material TM-SHIRT##. 4-1-1 Create a purchase requisition for your material TM-SHIRT##.Exercise Unit: Topic: AFS Procurement Purchase Requisition At the conclusion of this exercise. Why is the purchasing organization automatically set in the purchase requisition? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ Make a note of the purchase requisition number: _____________________ © SAP AG ICP320 3-55 . Data Purchasing Organization: Purchasing Group Plant: Storage Location: Material: Quantities: XS Blue 250 S M 200 0001 001 0001 WM01 TM-SHIRT## L XL 150 Assign the source of supply (vendor) in reference with the created contract. You can order material TM-SHIRT## from both vendors TM-SUPPA## and TM-SUPPB##.

© SAP AG ICP320 3-56 .

Perform a route determination in your purchase order. Ex factory date: Delivery date: 5-1-6 5-1-7 __________________________ __________________________ Add additional purchase texts for some grid values. Route Determination At the conclusion of this exercise. you will be able to: • • Maintain a purchase order with AFS material. Save the purchase order and make a note of the purchase order number: _________________________ © SAP AG ICP320 3-57 . Check the conditions with the conditions set for this vendor. 5-1-1 5-1-2 5-1-3 5-1-4 5-1-5 Convert your purchase requisition for material TM-SHIRT## into a purchase order. Convert your purchase requisition into a purchase order and perform a route determination to recalculate the delivery date. Check the grid and the purchase grid. 5-1 Convert the purchase requisition into a purchase order. Check the dates as ex factory date and the delivery date.Exercise Unit: Topic: AFS Procurement Purchase Order. Check the vendor additional number with the data in the info record.

Use the forward calculation method. Which route has been determined? New delivery date: New ex factory date: _______________________ _______________________ _______________________ 5-3 Optional: Display the output message.5-2 Optional: Use the route determination functionality in your purchase order. 5-2-1 Set the following data in the purchasing info record on the AFS Additional data screen. Data Vendor Material Transportation Lead Time Transport zone Trans. © SAP AG ICP320 3-58 . Group Transport condition 5-2-2 TM-SUPPB## TM-SHIRT## 5 0000000001 0001 01 Now perform the route determination for your purchase order.

To display the categories select in Customizing: Logistics General→ AFS Categories → Define Coverage Strategies Mark Category Structure C001. 1-1-1 In the AFS basic data (group box Basic Data) you will find the number of the master grid: TM-SHIRT. 1-1-3 In the purchasing view key in the purchase organization 0001 in the group box Source allocation. Check Customizing: IMG: Materials Management → Purchasing → Conditions → Define Price Determination Process → Define Schema Determination → (Determine Calculation Schema for Standard Purchase Orders) The AFS calculation schema is J_3A00. red (RED) and blue (BLU). 1-1-2 In the AFS basic data view you will find the number of the coverage strategy: CMC. 1-2-1 1-2-2 You find the schema group. Logistics → Materials Management → Material master → Material → Change → Immediately. Key in the plant number 0001. then doubleclick on Stock Category Comb.. Purchasing Info Record and Conditions 1-1 Maintain the AFS data in the material master.Solution Unit: Topic: AFS Procurement Material Master. Key in the material number TM-SHIRT##. Open another session to display the grid values select: Logistics → AFS Central Functions → Grids → Material grid → Display Key in the number of the master grid and confirm with ENTER. press ENTER and select the views AFS basic data. The colors that are valid for your material are yellow (YLW). Doubleclick on Coverage Strategies. The valid categories are blank. © SAP AG ICP320 3-59 . select the purchasing data view and press ENTER. first quality (1) and second quality (2). AFS MRP and Purchasing. vendor J1 in the group box conditions. Vendor Master. Mark CMC. 1-2 Maintain the AFS data in the vendor masters: Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Master data → Vendor → Central → Change Key in the vendor number and the purchasing organization 0001.

data1> button. You find the calculated Planned delivery time when pressing <Purch. Data Vendor Material: Purchasing Organization: Plant 1-3-1 TM-SUPPA## TM-SHIRT## 0001 0001 Press the <SKU data> button. © SAP AG ICP320 3-60 . No.mat.org. Then key in NORMAL in the field Add.1-3 Maintain the AFS data in the info records: Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Master data → Info record → Change. You will find the confirmation control key in the group box Control.org. data> To check the confirmation control key press the <Purch. 1-3-2 1-3-3 1-4 Maintain prices at SKU level: 1-4-1 Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Master data → Conditions → Other → Create. Press the <SKU data> button and then the <AFS Additional Data> button. Enter control key 0005. Key in the condition type J3AP and select the key combination material info record with grid value. Key in the number of the material and of the vendor and press ENTER. To select all grid values with the dimension XL use the F4-help of the field Grid va. Press the Button < Insert grid values automatically> or select the grid values with the F4-help in the field GrV and maintain the prices in the field Rates.no and set the Use Add. indicator.

Key in your material in the field Material Based and select Grid values in the group box Distribute requirements to. Use the <Grid processing> and <Rotate> to facilitate maintenance. Presizing. 2-2-2 Press the button <Control Data>.Solution Unit: Topic: AFS Procurement Purchase Grid. restrict the grid values and save your purchase grid. Press the button <grid>. Rounding 2-1 Create a purchase grid: 2-1-1 Logistics → AFS Central Functions → Grids → Grid control data → Purchasing Grid → Create Key in the condition type PGRD and select the key combination -Purchase organization-Vendor-Material. Assign the price groups to the grid values and save your grid cell control data.grid. Key in the price groups 01. 2-2-3 2-3 Optional: Create a distribution profile: Logistics → Production → Production Planning → AFS Profiles→ Distribution Profiles →Maintain.no.no. Key in the material TM-SHIRT## in the field Material and the purchase grid number PGRD-B## in the field Mat. To assign the price groups to your grid values press the button <Mode> and select the <Mode>Grid value group for Price determination. © SAP AG ICP320 3-61 . Press the button <grid>. 02 and 03 in the field G rid Value Group and maintain the different prices in the field Rates.grid. 2-2 Maintain price groups: 2-2-1 Logistics → AFS Central Functions → Grids → Grid control data → Purchasing Grid → Create Key in the condition type PGRD and select the key combination Purchase organization-Vendor-Material. Key in the material TM-SHIRT## in the field Material and the purchase grid number PGRD-A## in the field Mat. copy all grid values and save your purchase grid. Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Master data → Conditions → Other → Create Create an AFS condition record for the AFS condition type J3AP with the key combination material info record with grid value group.

2-4-1 Press the <Copy Grid Value> button and select all grid values. 2-5 Optional: Create a purchase order. © SAP AG ICP320 3-62 . Then key in the rounding factor for the selected grid values in the field Vendor ROF and press the button <Save Values>. Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Master data → Info record → Change. To check the prices have a look at tabstrip Conditions.2-4 Optional: Use the rounding functionality. 2-5-1 2-5-2 2-5-3 To use the presizing functionality. go to the Item detail screen and press the button <Presizing>. press the button <Round Values>. Info category: Standard In the overview screen press the button <SKU data>. Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Purchase Order → Create → Vendor/Supplying Plant known In the Item Overview screen key in the material and the quantity. Repeat the procedure for the other grid values and set the USE ROF indicator. then <copy> Press the button <Fast Entry> and flag all grid values that shall have the same rounding factor. Select the button <AFS Additional Data> to set the rounding method. To use the rounding functionality.

Confirm the AFS Rounding pop up with enter and save. then press Button <AFS Additional Data>. To check the released quantity in the first level contract go back to the opening screen.<Create referencing contract>. Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Outline agreement → Contract → Create Key in the data. (if a pop up occurs: save anyway). Mark the item line – press button <Additional Data>. 3-1-3 Check the open target quantities in the second level contract: Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Outline agreement → Contract → Display Enter your quantity contract number. Green arrow back 2x.Solution Unit: Topic: AFS Procurement Multi Level Contract 3-1 Create an AFS first level and a second level contract: 3-1-1 Create an AFS first level contract. Note the contract number. Pop up: Contract release order. next <Grid entry>. mark the line (item 10). then enter your Material TM-SHIRT## and the net price. Note the contract number. Enter the quantity 600. enter the above contract number at Outline agreement. 3-1-2 Create a quantity contract: Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Outline agreement → Contract → Create Enter the data. enter your number. press in the Item Overview screen the button <AFS additional data> and press the button <Open Target qty>. (Enter and save anyway). To display the open quantities mark the item line 10. © SAP AG ICP320 3-63 . enter. Button. mark the item line 10 and press in the Item Overview screen the button <AFS additional data> and then the button <Released Target qty>. Enter. Distribute the quantity to two or three different grid values (all 600). Save the contract.

With Drag and Drop put your quantity contract in the black square next to NB Standard PO. If you want to restrict the F4-Help (field grid value) to exactly the grid values that are part of the second level contract press the button <Compare>. 3-1-5 See solution to 3-1-3. © SAP AG ICP320 3-64 . tabstrip Delivery schedule enter a quantity in column Scheduled quantity. Save and note the PO number.3-1-4 Create a purchase order with reference to the second level contract. Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Purchase Order → Create → Vendor known <Document Overview> on. select Selection variant contracts. In the item detail screen. Then select some grid values and quantities.

Solution Unit: Topic: AFS Procurement Purchase Requisition 4-1 Create a purchase requisition and carry out the source allocation for it: 4-1-1 Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Purchase Requisition → Create Enter the material. plant and storage location. In the tab strip Delivery schedule press <Grid entry> and enter the sizes. In the tab strip Source of supply press <Assign the source of supply> and select the vendor in reference with the created contract. The purchasing organization is automatically set in the purchase requisition because the automatic purchasing organization indicator is set in Customizing and the purchasing organization 0001 has been assigned to the material on the purchasing view of the material master. © SAP AG ICP320 3-65 .

© SAP AG ICP320 3-66 .

To check the grid. Press the <SKU data> button and then the <AFS Additional Data> button. 5-2 Optional: Use the route determination functionality in your purchase order. To add additional purchase texts for some grid values press the <Text> button. 5-1-2 Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Purchase order → Change To check the conditions see tab strip Conditions in the Item details screen of your purchase order. Select the purchase requisition and press the button <Adopt>. 5-2-1 Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Master data → Info record → Change Enter your Vendor TM-SUPP### and your Material TM-SHIRT##. To check the ex factory date and the delivery date in your purchase order see tab strips Material data and Delivery schedule in the Item details. Select your contract and press the button <Process assignment>. Maintain the data in the group box Route determination. 5-1-1 Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Purchase order → Create → via Req.Assgt.Solution Unit: Topic: AFS Procurement Purchase Order. Save your purchase order. There you find the relevant Matrix/Conversion information. 5-1-3 5-1-4 5-1-5 5-1-6 You can see a vendor additional number on tab strip Material Data in the Item Details in your purchase order. 5-2-2 Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Purchase Order → Change On tab strip Delivery schedule press the button <Route determination>. Key in your vendor as a selection criteria and press F8. Route Determination 5-1 Convert the purchase requisition into a purchase order. © SAP AG ICP320 3-67 .List. press the button <Grid entry> in the Item details.

Enter your PO-number and execute. Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Purchase order → Messages → Print/transmit. Flag your PO and push button <Display message>. © SAP AG ICP320 3-68 .5-3 Optional: Display the output message.

Inventory Management: Course Content Preface Unit 1 Unit 2 Unit 3 Unit 4 Unit 5 Unit 6 Unit 7 Unit 8 Unit 9 Unit 10 Course Overview Master Data Procurement Inventory Management Invoice Verification Special Business Processes Product Forecasting Planning MRP Production Conclusion Appendices © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 4-1 .

Inventory Management Contents: Goods Receipt Batch Tracing Stock Transfer Reservations Consignment Physical Inventory © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 4-2 .

you will be able to: Create a goods receipt for AFS products Set up a goods receipt in Customizing Name the batch levels in AFS Post a stock transfer using one-step and twostep procedures Create a stock transport order Explain the concept of reservations for AFS products Outline the consignment process Carry out a physical inventory in the system © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 4-3 .Inventory Management: Unit Objectives After completing this unit.

Inventory Management: Course Overview Diagram AFS Master Data Material Grids Categories Material Master Customer Master Vendor Master Bill of Materials Pricing Value Added Services Seasons Sales and Distribution Sales MRP Procurement Allocation Run Delivery Billing Sales Information System Procurement Purchase Source Purchase Requisition Allocation Order Warehouse Management Production SOP MRP Markers Valuation/ Production Production Product Order Lots Costing Goods Receipt Routing Planned Order Invoice Verification AFS specific functionality ERP Standard functionality with AFS enhancements © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 4-4 .

Your enterprise has to carry out a physical inventory of its warehouse stock at least once per fiscal year. You have a shortage of 100 pairs of shoes in your German plant to fulfill sales orders. You deliver stock from your plants in Germany and Slovenia. © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 4-5 . so you transfer the material from your plant in Slovenia to your German plant To transfer the stock.Inventory Management: Business Scenario The purchased material has arrived at your warehouse and a goods receipt can be posted. you must create a stock transport order as both plants want to plan their requirements.

Purchasing Process Material Master Vendor Master Purchase Planning Requirement MRP Requisition Source Determination Info Record Conditions Vendor Selection RFQ Quotation Multi-Level Contract Order Purchase Processing Order Shipping Notification Purchase Follow Up Goods Receipt Invoice Verification Material Document Payment Invoice © SAP AG 2008 The goods receipt process consists of: Verifying the receipt against the order Valuating material at purchase order price Creating material and accounting documents to record the event Updating the purchase order history Providing a basis for invoice verification © SAP AG ICP320 4-6 .

Cancellations are always adjusted to grid value level. Underdelivery and overdelivery are checked. all open purchase order items and the number of pieces per grid value using product grid processing facilities.Inventory Management . Category Qty 6 BLK 8 BLK 9 BLK Total: 10 12 15 50 © SAP AG 2008 AFS supports goods receipt for purchase orders by entering the number of the purchase order. The storage location and the quality inspection indicator are copied from the purchase order item or can be set manually. AFS supports the postings of quality inspection stock back to the unrestricted-use stock (movement type 321) or from the goods receipt blocked stock back to the unrestricted-use stock (movement type 343). © SAP AG ICP320 4-7 .Goods Receipt Post goods receipt: Movement Type Plant Storage Location Vendor Material Quantity 101 0001 0001 Miller A1000 50 Gr.V. The delivery costs planned for the purchase order are transferred automatically.

To enter the goods receipt quantities respectively.g.Goods Receipt . V. 6 BLK 8 BLK 9 BLK 101 0001 0001 Miller A1000 50 Quantity 10 12 15 Gr.Category Split Movement Type Plant Storage Location Vendor Material Quantity Gr. V. 6 BLK 6 BLK 8 BLK 9 BLK Category PLABEL-1-EU PLABEL-2-EU PLABEL-1-EU PLABEL-1-EU Total: 50 Quantity 5 5 12 15 Category PLABEL-1-EU PLABEL-1-EU PLABEL-1-EU Total: 50 © SAP AG 2008 You can further assign different stock categories on grid value level. 5 pc of size 6 BLK are only 2nd quality. select the desired grid value and choose split quantity. e. © SAP AG ICP320 4-8 .

You can change this quantity if it differs from the delivered quantity.or overdeliveries can be identified. it is also possible to enter a percentage value for underdelivery tolerance. the system proposes the open purchase order quantity of an item for the goods receipt. a percentage overdelivery tolerance can be specified in the order item. For AFS materials. this is interpreted and accepted as a partial delivery. it is possible to enter an under and overdelivery tolerance on SKU level in the purchasing info record or in the purchase order itself. The system points out the underdelivery to the user and also takes the underdelivery tolerance into account when issuing the dialog message. In the order item.Goods Receipt . overdeliveries are acceptable. thus allowing unlimited overdelivery. the system compares the goods receipt quantity with the quantity in the open purchase order. As a rule. When you enter a goods receipt item. This way. The overdelivery tolerance check can be suppressed in the order item. If the quantity of goods received is smaller than the ordered quantity minus the underdelivery tolerance. If however. The standard ERP System does not allow overdeliveries. © SAP AG ICP320 4-9 .Under and Overdelivery Underdelivery tolerance 10% Purchase Order Quantity = 100 Overdelivery tolerance 20% 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 Underdelivery Warning Overdelivery Error Message © SAP AG 2008 In the case of a goods receipt with reference to a purchase order. under. underdeliveries are allowed in the standard ERP System.

If the delivered quantity at item level is within the tolerance. © SAP AG ICP320 4-10 . 2. The DCI is set at item level and all SKU levels. if the delivered quantity is within the tolerance at all SKU levels and at item level.Goods Receipt . 3. the system sets the Delivery Complete Indicator (DCI) at item level and also at SKU level. In this case it can happen that the DCI will be set at item level although the delivered quantity is not within the tolerance at item level. see Appendix. For menu paths. The DCI is set at item level and at all SKU levels.DCI at Item/SKU level (1) Delivery Complete Indicator PO item tolerance DCI for all SKUs SKUs and tolerance 1 2 3 © SAP AG 2008 You can choose one of the following possibilities in Customizing: 1.

Goods Receipt .DCI . although the delivered quantity for the SKU 6 is not within the tolerance. so the DCI is set at item level and all SKU levels.Purchase Order Item Tolerance Example 1 PO Quantity 200 pair SHOES 100 pair size 6 100 pair size 7 PO item tolerance DCI for all SKUs SKUs and tolerance SHOES Size 6 Size 7 © SAP AG 2008 Underdelivery Tolerance 5% Item 5% SKU Goods Receipt 190 pair SHOES 90 pair size 6 100 pair size 7 Delivery Completed Indicator The DCI at item level is within the tolerance. © SAP AG ICP320 4-11 .

although the quantity is not within the tolerance of the item. © SAP AG ICP320 4-12 .DCI .for all SKU´s Example 2 PO Quantity 200 pair SHOES 100 pair size 6 100 pair size 7 PO item tolerance DCI for all SKUs SKUs and tolerance SHOES Size 6 Size 7 © SAP AG 2008 Underdelivery Tolerance 5% Item 10% SKU Goods Receipt 180 pair SHOES 90 pair size 6 90 pair size 7 Delivery Completed Indicator The DCI is also set at item level.Goods Receipt .

DCI .Goods Receipt .SKU´s and tolerance Example 3 PO Quantity 200 pair SHOES 100 pair size 6 100 pair size 7 PO item tolerance DCI for all SKUs SKUs and tolerance SHOES Size 6 Size 7 © SAP AG 2008 Underdelivery Tolerance 5% Item 5% SKU Goods Receipt 190 pair SHOES 90 pair size 6 100 pair size 7 Delivery Completed Indicator The system does not set the DCI at item level because the preconditions (DCI set on all SKU levels) are not fulfilled. © SAP AG ICP320 4-13 .

the batch is dependent upon the plant. The same batch number can also be assigned to other material/plant combinations. © SAP AG ICP320 4-14 .Batch Unique at Plant Level Material A Material B Plant 1 Plant 2 Plant 1 Plant 2 Batch 6 BLK Goods Receipt: January 16th Grid Value: 6 BLK © SAP AG 2008 Batch 6 BLK Goods Receipt: January 19th Grid Value: 6 BLK Batch 6 BLK Goods Receipt: January 17th Grid Value: 6 BLK Batch 6 BLK Goods Receipt: January 18th Grid Value: 6 BLK AFS Materials require batch management. The batch is used to map the level of grid and category values. That means that with regard to identical constituents.Batch Level in AFS . The “Batch unique at plant level” indicator signifies that batches are unique at material/plant level. In the standard ERP System the following batch levels are available: Batch unique at plant level Batch unique at material level Batch unique at client level AFS supports Batch unique at plant level.

© SAP AG ICP320 4-15 . Batch Number: Grdval Batch Number: X Grid Value 6 BLK Stock Category Goods Receipt Unrestricted use 50 Material A Grid Value:6 BLK 100 pair Material A Batch 6 BLK Material A Batch 6 BLK © SAP AG 2008 Grid Value 6 BLK Stock Category - Unrestricted use 150 In the material master in the AFS MRP view. and the batch number is 6 BLK. the color is black.Internal Batch Numbering . the system will assign a batch number that is equivalent to the grid value at each goods receipt. the size is 6.Grid Value Batch Number Material A: Master Record AFS MRP-View: Coverage Strategy: w/o Disc. Grid value batch numbering is only possible if no coverage strategy has been assigned. If you choose grid value batch numbering as in this example. In this example. you can specify the way in which you want to manage your batches.

© SAP AG ICP320 4-16 . If for some reason. the system assigns the same batch numbers to the same grid values.Internal Batch Numbering . When you post the goods receipt. Batch Number: Grdval Batch Number: Grid Value 6 BLK Stock Category 001A Goods Receipt Unrestricted use 50 Material A Grid Value:6 BLK Category:001A 100 pair Material A Batch 0000000001 © SAP AG 2008 Material A Batch 0000000001 Grid Value 6 BLK Stock Category 001A Unrestricted use 150 If you have flagged batch management only without discrete or grid value batch numbering. the system has stored the same grid values with different batch numbers. the system informs you that it has assigned the same batch number to the same grid value.Batch Number Per Grid / Category Value Material A: Master Record AFS MRP-View: Coverage Strategy: w/ or w/o Disc. If you enter a new grid value. the system assigns a new batch number. it offers both so that you can choose one of them.

Batch Number: X Grdval Batch Number: Grid Value 6 BLK Stock Category 001A Goods Receipt Unrestricted use 50 Material A Grid Value:6 BLK Category:001A Material A Batch 0000000001 0000000002 © SAP AG 2008 Material A Batch 0000000001 100 pair Grid Value 6 BLK 6 BLK Stock Category 001A 001A Unrestricted use 50 100 Discrete batch numbering is possible with or without an assigned coverage strategy. If you use discrete batch numbering. a batch number is assigned to every grid value. © SAP AG ICP320 4-17 . This applies to different as well as identical grid values.Internal Batch Numbering .Discrete Batch Number Material A: Master Record AFS MRP-View: Coverage Strategy: w/ or w/o Disc. A new batch number is therefore assigned to each grid value for any goods receipt.

Stock transfers can be done from Plant to Plant and from Storage Location to Storage Location. no physical movement occurs Quality Inspection to Unrestricted Use © SAP AG 2008 The difference between stock transfer and transfer posting is: Transfer postings usually only involve the stock type batch number or material number change. You can post stock transfers in one or two steps. or a transport order Storage Location to Storage Location Category PLABEL-1-EU Material to Material Transfer Posting A change in stock type. © SAP AG ICP320 4-18 .Stock Transfer / Transfer Posting Stock Transfers Transfers Transfer Postings Category PLABEL-1-EU Plant to Plant Stock Transfers Physical movement of material Transfers can use a one-step or two-step procedure. and not a physical material movement. Transfer Posting for Allocated stock: You can make a transfer posting to another storage location for stock that has already been allocated to a sales order by the Allocation Run. Transfer Posting: You can use Transfer Posting to change the grid value and/or category of a material on stock (Movement Type: 309).g. Stock Transfer: In each case a stock transfer consists of a goods issue from the issuing location and a goods receipt at the receiving location. batch number or material number Generally. e. quality inspection stock to unrestricted use. Transfer Posting is also used to change the stock type. A transfer posting is therefore a type of “logical” movement Stock transfers involve physical movements AFS supports stock transfers and transfer postings at SKU level including grid and category values.

The stock transfer takes place between two plants but involves two different company codes. © SAP AG ICP320 4-19 . Stock transfer can take place within a plant from one storage location to another storage location.Levels 001 0001 0002 0001 001 0002 Company Code Company Code Plant 0001 Plant 0002 Storage Location 0001 Storage Location 0002 © SAP AG 2008 A company-to-company code can be regarded as an organizational level.Stock Transfer . Stock transfer can take place between two plants that belong to the same company code.

No accounting document is created for the material document. This transfer is posted without a value since the transferred material remains in the same plant and is thus managed with the same valuation data. The stock transfer reduces the corresponding type of stock at the issuing storage location and increases the same type of stock at the receiving storage location. This stock transfer is possible for all stock types. You can change grid values and/or category while posting a stock transfer.Stock Transfer . No change in stock occurs at plant level. Neither shipping in the issuing plant nor purchasing in the receiving plant is involved in the process. Movement Type: 311 The one-step procedure can also be used to transfer stock from plant to plant.One-Step Precedure Storage Location 0001 Storage Location 0002 UnrestrictedUse Stock UnrestrictedUse Stock Category PLABEL-1-EU Category PLABEL-2-EU © SAP AG 2008 This type of stock transfer can only be carried out in inventory management. Movement Type: 301 © SAP AG ICP320 4-20 . The plant stock does not change. A stock transfer from one storage location to another takes place within a plant. The stock transfer is valued at the valuation price of the material in the issuing plant.

it is possible to monitor the stocks that are being transferred. the quantity is finally posted to the unrestricted-use stock. the categories will not be transferred into the stock in transfer . Once the issuing plant/ storage location has posted goods issue. © SAP AG ICP320 4-21 .Two-Step Procedure Plant 0001 Plant 0002 UnrestrictedUse Stock Stock in Transfer Category PLABEL-1-EU UnrestrictedUse Stock Category PLABEL-2-EU © SAP AG 2008 This type of stock transfer can only be carried out in inventory management. When the goods receipt is posted in the receiving plant. Neither shipping in the issuing plant nor purchasing in the receiving plant is involved in the process. The transfer posting is valued at the valuation price of the material in the issuing plant. the stock is seen at the receiving plant as “stock in transfer”. If you create a stock transfer for an AFS material with categories. The stock transfer includes the following processes: Removal in the issuing plant / Placement in the receiving plant (Movement Type: 303 / 305) Removal in the issuing storage location / Placement in the receiving storage location (Movement Type: 313 / 315) With the two-step procedure.you have to assign a new category. This enables you to monitor the quantity “on the road”.Stock Transfer .

AFS supports this goods movement at SKU level including grid and category values. the stock category of the stock transfer order will be used. the categories will be converted from the stock category of the receiving plant to the requirement category of the issuing plant. but does not belong to unrestricted-use stock. © SAP AG ICP320 4-22 . The stock in transit is valued at the valuation price of the material in the issuing plant. This type of stock transfer involves inventory management as well as purchasing in the receiving plant.Stock Transfer . it is possible to execute stock transfers as a planned goods movement from plant to plant. With the stock transport order. In the stock transport order. When posting a goods receipt with reference to the order.Stock Transport Order Stock Transport Order Receiving Plant A Category PLABEL-1-EU Issuing Plant B UnrestrictedUse Stock B B BC A Category PLABEL-1-EU Category PLABEL-1-EU Stock in Transit Category PLABEL-1-DE Goods Receipt Goods Issue UnrestrictedUse Stock B B BC A Category PLABEL-1-DE © SAP AG 2008 Stock transport orders can be managed with or without SD. It is managed at plant level.

Date Quantity Grid value © SAP AG 2008 The Stock Transport Order includes the option of ATP check for materials in the issuing plant.Stock Transfer .Stock Transport Order incl. © SAP AG ICP320 4-23 . ATP ATP Result ATP Overview ATP Result Explain ATP ATP Overview Explain ATP Explain ATP Order No Item Stock No Slot S. Date R.

which means that required materials are procured in time if they are out of stock. Storage Location Planning a Goods Movement Planning an Inward movement Planning Planning an Outward an inward movement Movement Planning Planning a Transfer an inward movement Posting © SAP AG 2008 Reservations are requests to the warehouse to have materials ready for issue at a later date and for a certain purpose. Reservations are used to ensure that a material is available at the time it is required. © SAP AG ICP320 4-24 . Reservations are taken into account by Material Requirements Planning (MRP).Reservations (1) Reservation ^ = Plant. A reservation can also be the pre-planning of a receipt. AFS supports reservations at SKU level including grid and category values.

© SAP AG ICP320 4-25 .Reservations (2) Reservation Header Item Item Item Account Assignment Base Date Check Calendar Grid Value / Requirement Category Plant / Storage Location / Batch Requirement Date Movements Allowed © SAP AG 2008 Analysis and administration tools are available for the reservation handling.

You can define consignment prices at SKU level. However. Do not enter a net price. Goods Receipt: After a goods receipt for consignment material has been posted. Invoice Verification: After the goods issue. for example. Goods Issue: When withdrawing a material from the consignment stores for an account assignment object. the consignment stock of the material increases. Purchasing: The procedure for creating consignment purchase requisitions and consignment purchase orders is the same as for regular purchase orders. the vendor is due the net value of the goods issue. the vendor is required so that you can determine the relevant consignment pricing data. The invoice is due at set periods of time. The vendor provides goods that are stored in consignment stores. The vendor remains owner of the material until you withdraw materials from the consignment stores. Enter K for the consignment item. the material‘s valuated stock does not increase since the consignment stock still belongs to the vendor. © SAP AG ICP320 4-26 . monthly.Consignment Master data Purchasing Inventory Management Stock B B B C A Invoice Verification Invoice Shoes 8 BLK Price 95 USD Purchase Order K Shoes 8 BLK Price 0 Consignment Price Material/ Vendor: Price = 95 USD Consignment Item Consignment Stores available not valuated GR GI Accounting © SAP AG 2008 AFS supports consignment processing at SKU level.

2. as well as printing and distributing the physical inventory document. You should check whether the transferred count result is correct (change count) or whether you want to initiate a recount. Physical inventory preparation This includes creating a physical inventory document. © SAP AG ICP320 4-27 .Process Create physical inventory document Blocking indicator Print physical inventory document Enter physical inventory count List of differences Initial recount Change count Post Differences © SAP AG 2008 Independent of the physical inventory procedure. the physical inventory process can be divided into three phases. it is posted and stock is corrected. 3. If the difference is accepted. These are then transferred from the count list to the system in the step “enter physical inventory count”. Physical inventory check Using the list of inventory differences. Physical inventory count The stocks in the warehouse are counted and the count results are entered in the count list. 1.Physical Inventory . blocking materials for posting. you can check variances in the stock.

You can block the SKUs either directly on entry of the physical inventory document (if the count is to take place immediately) or shortly before the count (if the count is to take place at a later time).511 Ladies Shoes Cynthia 0000002064 6 BLK Not yet counted SHOES .511 Ladies Shoes Cynthia 0000002065 6 RED Not yet counted 001 PAA 002 0001 0001 Warehouse 001A 144 © SAP AG 2008 When creating an inventory document you can select single grid values and categories. Short text Batch Grid Value Category Status of the item SHOES . The blocking indicator is set at SKU level.Physical Inventory . © SAP AG ICP320 4-28 . Inv.05. Planned count date Itm : 0001 : Chicago : 100000017 : 29. In the standard ERP System.Document Plant Description Phys. you can use the following physical inventory procedures: Periodic inventory Continuous inventory Cycle counting Inventory sampling AFS supports periodic and continuous inventory. bin Stock type Counted qty Unit 0001 0001 Warehouse 001A 502 Material Mat. A new form J_3AINVENT has been created for printing the AFS inventory document.2000 Sloc Stor. Doc.

Do not enter ‘0’ in the quantity column because the system interprets the zero as “not yet counted”. If a quantity of zero was counted for an item. enter this by selecting the ZC (zero count) column. © SAP AG ICP320 4-29 .Enter Counting Result Plant Storage Location 0001 0001 Counted Quantity Items Item Material Batch Material description 1 SHOES .511 GRV 6 RED 0000002064 1 Sty Quantity Quantity 502 500 144 UnE ZC SKU PAA PAA PAA PAA Ladies Shoes „Cynthia“ 0000002056 Stock Category 001A 1 150 Ladies Shoes „Cynthia“ Stock Category 001A Indicator: Zero Count © SAP AG 2007 After the count has been performed.511 GRV 6 BLK 2 SHOES . you must enter the results of the count into the system.Physical Inventory .

it is not possible to post the difference. Therefore posting inventory differences does not result in a price change.Posting Inventory Differences Material Master Standard Price 10 Total Stock 1 000 Paa 10 000 Total Value Grid Values: 500 Paa 6 BLK 500 Paa 6 RED Posted Inventory Count 450 Paa 6 BLK 600 Paa 6 RED Posted Inventory Differences Material Master Standard Price 10 Total Stock 1 050 Paa 10 500 Total Value Grid Values: 450 Paa 6 BLK 600 Paa 6 RED Stock account for material Expense from ph.Physical Inventory . The amount posted is calculated on the basis of the current standard or moving average price. the material master record is changed and the total stock is automatically adjusted to the counted quantity. © SAP AG ICP320 4-30 . First you have to deallocate the “missing” quantity. inventory Stock account for material Revenue from ph. inventory 500 500 + 1000 + 1000 - © SAP AG 2008 When you post inventory differences. If the counted quantity is smaller than the reserved quantity (=quantity allocated by the Allocation Run).

Inventory Management: Unit Summary You should now be able to: Create a goods receipt for AFS products Set up a goods receipt in Customizing Name the batch levels in AFS Post a stock transfer using one-step and two-step procedures Create a stock transport order Explain the concept of reservations for AFS products Outline the consignment process Carry out a physical inventory in the system © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 4-31 .

© SAP AG ICP320 4-32 .

1-1-1 Create a goods receipt for your purchase order (which you created in exercise 214). © SAP AG ICP320 4-33 . you will be able to: • • Create a goods receipt for a purchase order Use the split quantity function The purchased material TM-SHIRT## has arrived at your warehouse and a goods receipt can be posted. Furthermore 125 pcs of size XS are not the expected quality 1 and therefore use the Split quantity function. 1-1 Create a goods receipt for your purchase order and use the split quantity function. Use the Copy order quantity. First enter the Header Data: Data Movement type Purchase order Plant Storage location 101 your purchase order number 0001 WM01 Copy the item of your purchase order and post the goods receipt. Blue Quality 1 Quality 2 1-1-2 XS 125 125 S M 100 L XL 150 Make a note of the document number: __________________________ Check the DCI in your purchase order at dimension level and monitor the stock in plant 0001 for your material TM-SHIRT##. The vendor delivers only a 100 pcs of size M instead of the ordered 200 pcs. A part of one grid value has been delivered in a second quality.Exercise Unit: Topic: Inventory Management Goods Receipt At the conclusion of this exercise.

© SAP AG ICP320 4-34 .

from the unrestricted stock of storage location 0001 to the unrestricted stock of storage location 0002. you will be able to: • Post a stock transfer from storage location to storage location with AFS material Within your plant 0001 the material TM.Exercise Optional Unit: Topic: Inventory Management Transfer Posting At the conclusion of this exercise. Post the stock transfer in one step. 2-1-1 Post a stock transfer for 10 pairs of TM-SHOE##. size 8. Which movement type do you have to use? Data Movement type Plant Supplying storage location Receiving storage location ______ 0001 0001 0002 Make a note of the document number: __________________________ © SAP AG ICP320 4-35 . 2-1 Post a stock transfer from storage location 0001 to storage location 0002.SHOE## is stored in two storage locations. You want to move the goods from storage location 0001 to storage location 0002.

© SAP AG ICP320 4-36 .

Post a goods issue of plant 0010 to the stock in transit with reference to the stock transport order. Data Movement type Plant Storage location 351 0010 0001 Make a note of the document number: ____________________________ © SAP AG ICP320 4-37 . Data Supplying plant Order type Purchasing Organization Purchasing Group Receiving plant Storage location Material Quantity: 0010 UB 0001 001 0001 0001 TM-SHOE## 200 pairs (100 pairs of size 7 and 100 pairs of size 8) Make a note of the stock transport order number: ___________________ 3-1-2 3-1-3 Run MRP for plant 0010 and check the assignment of the transport requirement and the stock.Exercise Optional Unit: Topic: Inventory Management Stock Transport Order At the conclusion of this exercise. The goods issue posting in Inventory Management will be carried out without the involvement of SD (optional exercise: with the involvement of SD). you have to create a stock transport order (located in MRP). you will be able to: • Create a stock transport order and monitor the stock while it is in transit You want to transfer 200 pairs of the shoe TM-SHOE## (100 of size 7 and 100 of size 8) from the plant in Slovenia to the plant in Germany. 3-1 Create a stock transport order and monitor the stock while it is in transit/ 3-1-1 Create a stock transport order for the material TM-SHOE## to transfer the material from plant 0010 to plant 0001 and check ATP. As both plants want to plan their requirements.

Material SKU Plant 0001 0010 0001 0010 Unrestricteduse stock Stock in transfer TM-SHOE## 7 TM-SHOE## 7 TM-SHOE## 8 TM-SHOE## 8 © SAP AG ICP320 4-38 . 101 0001 0001 Make a note of the document number: __________________________ Monitor the stock in transit of plant 0001.3-1-4 Monitor the stock in transit of plant 0001. Material SKU Plant 0001 0010 0001 0010 Unrestricteduse stock Stock in transit TM-SHOE## 7 TM-SHOE## 7 TM-SHOE## 8 TM-SHOE## 8 3-1-5 Data Movement type Plant Storage location 3-1-6 Post a goods receipt for plant 0001 with reference to the stock transport order.

storage location 0001: 4-1-2 4-1-3 Enter an inventory count for your inventory document. you will be able to: • • • Create a physical inventory document Enter a physical inventory count Post inventory differences You have to carry out a physical inventory of your warehouse stocks. Data Planned count date: Plant: Storage location: Today 0001 0001 Use the F4-Help for the field Batch to select batches of a single grid value. The entered quantity should be lower than the stock inventory balance. Post the inventory difference from your physical inventory document. The counted quantity of your material is lower than the stock inventory balance. Note the inventory document number: ________________ Monitor the unrestricted-use stock for your material TM-SHOE## in plant 0001.Exercise Optional Unit: Topic: Inventory Management Physical Inventory At the conclusion of this exercise. 4-1-1 Create a physical inventory document for size 8 of your material TM-SHOE##. no. 4-1 Carry out a physical inventory for your material TM-SHOE##. Therefore. Note the material doc. so you have to post the inventory difference. you have to create a physical inventory document for your material TM-SHOE##.: ________________________ © SAP AG ICP320 4-39 . Maintain the reason 4 (Theft).

© SAP AG ICP320 4-40 .

Select Adopt to see the ordered quantities at SKU level. Enter 125 pieces with stock category 1 and 125 pieces with stock category 2. flag size and press the button <Split Qty> to split the quantity of size XS. Enter the movement type and your PO number. 1-1-2 To check the DCI in your purchase order at dimension level select Logistics → Materials management → Purchasing → Purchase order → Display To monitor the stock in plant 0001 select: Logistics → Materials management → Inventory management → Environment → Stock → Stock overview © SAP AG ICP320 4-41 . Note the number. In the field Quantity in UnE enter the quantities you received from your vendor.Solution Unit: Topic: Inventory Management Goods Receipt 1-1 Create a goods receipt for your purchase order: 1-1-1 Logistics → Materials management → Inventory management → Goods movement → Goods receipt → For purchase order → PO number known. <Copy> your data and save the goods receipt.

© SAP AG ICP320 4-42 .

maintain grid values and quantities. To determine the movement type select Movement type F4 help: Transfer posting storage location (one-step) = Movement type 311. © SAP AG ICP320 4-43 . 2-1-1 Logistics → Materials management → Inventory management → Goods movement → Transfer posting. (you can check the availability of the sizes/grid value in the stock overview: see 3-1-2).Solution Optional Unit: Topic: Inventory Management Transfer Posting 2-1 Post a stock transfer from storage location 0001 to storage location 0002. Enter On the next screen enter the material number and the number of the receiving storage location 0002 and press ENTER.

© SAP AG ICP320 4-44 .

post goods receipt. Purchase Order. Enter the grid values and save. 3-1-4 Monitor the stock. Logistics → Materials management → Inventory management → Environment → Stock → Stock overview 3-1-5 Post a goods receipt for plant 0001: Logistics → Materials management → Inventory management → Goods movement → Goods Movement(MIGO) Select Goods Receipt. Note the stock transport number.Solution Optional Unit: Topic: Inventory Management Stock Transport Order 3-1 Create a stock transport order and monitor the stock while it is in transit. check the flag and press < Grid entry>. enter storage location 0001. enter storage location 0001. Press Check button. Press Check button. 3-1-2 Run MRP for plant 0010: Logistics → Materials management → Material Requirement Planning (MRP) → MRP → AFS Material Requirement Planning→ Single-item Planning 3-1-3 Post a goods issue of plant 0010: Logistics → Materials management → Inventory management → Goods movement → Goods movement (MIGO) Select Goods issue. and enter Purchase Order number and the movement type 101. 3-1-6 For menu path see solution 3-3-4. post goods issue. © SAP AG ICP320 4-45 . Purchase Order. Enter your material and the whole quantity. Set the OK flag for both items. Set the OK flag for both items. and enter Purchase Order number and the movement type 351. 3-1-1 Logistics → Production → DRP → Execution → Purchase Order→ Create Stock transfer Enter the data and press button<SKU Data>.

© SAP AG ICP320 4-46 .

© SAP AG ICP320 4-47 .Solution Optional Unit: Topic: Inventory Management Physical Inventory 4-1 Carry out a physical inventory for your material TM-SHOE##. Maintain the reason. Logistics → Materials management → Physical inventory → Inventory count → Enter Enter a lower quantity than that which is in stock. → Create Enter your material and use the F4-help on the Batch field to select the grid value size 8. Save. 4-1-3 Post the inventory difference: Logistics → Materials management → Physical inventory → Difference → Post Enter your physical inventory number. inventory doc. 4-1-1 Logistics → Materials management → Physical inventory → Phys. Doc. Message: Count entered for phys. Note the material document number. Monitor the unrestricted-use stock: Logistics → Materials management → Physical inventory → Environment → Stock overview 4-1-2 Enter an inventory count for your inventory document. inv.

© SAP AG ICP320 4-48 .

Invoice Verification: Course Content Preface Unit 1 Unit 2 Unit 3 Unit 4 Unit 5 Unit 6 Unit 7 Unit 8 Unit 9 Unit 10 Course Overview Master Data Procurement Inventory Management Invoice Verification Special Business Processes Product Forecasting Planning MRP Production Conclusion Appendices © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 5-1 .

Invoice Verification Contents: Invoice Verification © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 5-2 .

Invoice Verification: Unit Objectives After completing this course. you will be able to: Enter purchase-order-based and goods-receiptbased invoices © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 5-3 .

Invoice Verification: Course Overview Diagram AFS Master Data Material Grids Categories Material Master Customer Master Vendor Master Bill of Materials Pricing Value Added Services Seasons Sales and Distribution Sales MRP Procurement Allocation Run Delivery Billing Sales Information System Procurement Purchase Source Purchase Requisition Allocation Order Warehouse Management Production SOP MRP Markers Valuation/ Production Production Product Order Lots Costing Goods Receipt Routing Planned Order Invoice Verification AFS specific functionality ERP Standard functionality with AFS enhancements © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 5-4 .

Invoice Verification .Invoice Processing Master Data Invoice Verification Invoice Invoice Document Payment Program Purchase Order Material Document for Goods Receipt © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 5-5 .

© SAP AG ICP320 5-6 .100 Payment Stock Account GR/IR Vendor + 100 © SAP AG 2008 The Invoice Verification component is part of the Materials Management (MM) system.Account Postings Goods Receipt Stock +100 Account GR/IR Vendor . Controlling and Asset Accounting components.100 Invoice Verification Stock Account GR/IR + 100 Vendor . It provides the link between the Materials Management component and the Financial Accounting.Invoice Verification .

1266.05. © SAP AG ICP320 5-7 . This enhancement is valid for both goods-receipt-related and purchase-order-based invoice verification.000. Account 11223344 Bank of California bank code 300 210 55 © SAP AG 2008 You can carry out the logistics invoice verification at SKU level.00USD Ladies Shoes „Cynthia“ 50 pr 6 RED Cat 001A 180 USD each 9.800.Prices and Quantities on SKU Level Stock Keeping Unit SAP America 701 Lee Road Wayne PA 19087 Rogers & Hart Walnut Street Philadelphia PA 19101 03. We have supplied you with the following goods: Ladies Shoes „Cynthia“ 50 pr 6 BLK Cat 001A 200 USD each 10.04.980.00USD Payable within 20 days of invoice date.00USD 21.00 Logistics Invoice Verification: Prices at SKU Level (PO) Quantities at SKU Level (GR) Invoice no.Invoice Verification .00USD 19./33 Re: Your purchase order 4151599001 of 24. 2% cash discount if payment received within 10 days.000.780.00USD Tax 10% 1.

purchase order number Invoiced amount./33 Re: Your purchase order 4151599001 of 24.000.980. 1266. terms of payment (if necessary) The following are copied from the purchase order: Vendor.00USD 21.00USD Tax 10% 1.Invoice Verification .Information in Invoice Addressee Reference Purchase Order Invoice Items Material Quantity Unit of Measure Terms of Payment SAP America 701 Lee Road Wayne PA 19087 Stock Keeping Unit Rogers & Hart Walnut Street Philadelphia PA 19101 03. © SAP AG ICP320 5-8 . terms of payment (if defined there) Invoice items The following are transferred from the purchase order history: Quantity. 2% cash discount if payment received within 10 days. Account 11223344 Bank of California bank code 300 210 55 © SAP AG 2008 You must enter: Document date.800.00 Invoicing Party Document Date Amount per Unit Amount per Item Currency Tax Rate Tax Amount Invoice Amount Bank Information Invoice no. tax amount. We have supplied you with the following goods: Ladies Shoes „Cynthia“ 50 paa 6 BLK 200 USD each 10.00USD Ladies Shoes „Cynthia“ 50 paa 6 RED 180 USD each 9.04.780.00USD Payable within 20 days of invoice date.000. amount The following is proposed on the basis of the system settings: Rate at which tax is calculated The bank information is stored in the vendor master record.00USD 19.05.

You can define variable keys with the following elements: Company Code Plant Material User-ID (/AFS/IV_USR) This can only be used for purchase-order-based invoice verification. For menu paths.Invoice Verification . If you use the split valuation functionality (valuation at SKU level). © SAP AG ICP320 5-9 . you must indicate this in Customizing. see Appendix.PO-Item-Based 1 Delivery note BX123 25 paa 6 BLK 25 paa 6 RED 2 Delivery note BX456 20 paa 6 BLK 20 paa 6 RED 3 Delivery note BX789 5 paa 6 BLK 5 paa 6 RED Purchase order 4000000077 100 paa shoes • 50 paa 6 BLK • 50 paa 6 RED GR-based IV Invoice for purchase order 4000000077 100 paa shoes Selection via goods receipt/ delivery note Selection screen/item list X 4000000077 Selection via purchase order 100 paa SHOES © SAP AG 2008 If you want to post invoices on PO-item level. it is not possible to use PO itembased invoice verification.

© SAP AG ICP320 5-10 . In goods-receipt-based invoice verification.Invoice Verification .SKU-Level-Based 1 Delivery note BX123 25 paa 6 BLK 25 paa 6 RED 2 Delivery note BX456 20 paa 6 BLK 20 paa 6 RED 3 Delivery note BX789 5 paa 6 BLK 5 paa 6 RED Purchase order 4000000077 100 paa shoes • 50 paa 6 BLK • 50 paa 6 RED GR-based IV Invoice for purchase order 4000000077 100 paa shoes • 50 paa 6 BLK • 50 paa 6 RED © SAP AG 2008 Selection via goods receipt/ delivery note Selection screen/Item list X 4000000077 • 50 paa 6 BLK • 50 paa 6 RED Selection via purchase order SKU-level-based invoice verification is standard in AFS. it is mandatory to use SKU-level-based invoice verification. It can be used for purchase-order-based invoice verification goods-receipt-based invoice verification Goods-receipt-based invoice verification must be defined in the purchase order. each goods receipt is settled separately. If you use the split valuation functionality. In goods-receipt-based invoice verification. it is not possible to post an invoice before the first goods receipt. Goods receipts and invoices are matched up in the purchase order history.

Invoice Verification: Summary You should now be able to: Enter invoices referring to purchase orders or goods receipts and post these invoices. © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 5-11 .

© SAP AG ICP320 5-12 .

. Today 0001 V0 Your purchase order number Go to the item list. You might have ordered grid values other than the ones mentioned here: Vendor: VENDOR1-## Invoice Date: today Invoice 2312## This invoice is in reference to your purchase order #45. you will be able to: Post an invoice referring to goods receipt (goods-receipt based invoice verification). Today you received an invoice from your vendor TM-SUPPA##. TM-SHIRT## T-shirts 125 pieces 25 USD each XS Blue 3125 USD TM-SHIRT## T-shirts 125 pieces 25 USD each XS Blue 3125 USD TM-SHIRT## T-shirts 100 pieces 28 USD each M Blue 2800 USD TM-SHIRT## T-shirts 150 pieces 30USD each XL Blue 4500 USD --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Total Due 1-1-1 13550 USD Enter the invoice in the system by using Logistics Invoice Verification.. Where are the default values for quantity and amount coming from? © SAP AG ICP320 5-13 . Enter the Header Data: Data Document Date Company Code Tax Code Purchasing Doc..Exercise Unit: Topic: Invoice Verification Logistics Invoice Verification At the conclusion of this exercise. Now you have to enter the invoice into the R/3 system.. The invoice shown here is an example.. 1-1 You receive an invoice from your vendor referring to the purchase order (for which you posted the goods receipt in Exercise 3-1).

O. Post the document. quantity Goods Receipt Invoice Quantity quantity 1-1-3 1-1-4 Display the posted account document. Note the document number: ___________________________ Fill in the information in the following table: Material TM-SHIRT## TM-SHIRT## TM-SHIRT## TM-SHIRT## Grid Value P.1-1-2 Correct the gross invoice amount until there are no more differences. © SAP AG ICP320 5-14 .

Flag your PO and <Copy>. © SAP AG ICP320 5-15 . Data: Material TM-SHIRT## TM-SHIRT## TM-SHIRT## TM-SHIRT## 1-1-4 Grid Value P.. the invoice amount 13550 USD. Select Purchase Order and use the F4-help to enter your vendor TMSUPPA## as the invoicing party. Flag the calculate tax check box.. the tax code V0 and your purchase order number. Change the invoice amount manually to proceed: The quantities are defaulted from the goods receipt. quantity Goods Receipt Quantity BLUXS BLUXS BLUM BLUXL 125 125 200 150 250 0 100 150 Invoice quantity 3125 3125 2800 4500 To display the account document select: Logistics → Materials Management → Logistics Invoice Verification → Further Processing → Display Invoice Document Enter the document number and press the <Follow-on documents> button. the company code 0001. Then press <Enter> to view the data. Execute (F8). 1-1-2 1-1-3 Enter the Net Value in the gross invoice amount so the light will turn to green. In the amount column the system suggests the product of the quantity suggested and the order price.O. 1-1-1 To enter the invoice select: Logistics → Materials Management → Logistics Invoice Verification → Document Entry → Enter Invoice Enter the current date.Solution Unit: Topic: Invoice Verification Logistics Invoice Verification 1-1 You receive an invoice. This amount does not include tax.

© SAP AG ICP320 5-16 .

Special Business Processes: Course Content Preface Unit 1 Unit 2 Unit 3 Unit 4 Unit 5 Unit 6 Unit 7 Unit 8 Unit 9 Unit 10 Course Overview Master Data Procurement Inventory Management Invoice Verification Special Business Processes Product Forecasting Planning MRP Production Conclusion Appendices © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 6-1 .

Electronic Data Interchange LIS .Logistics Information System © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 6-2 .Special Business Processes and Additional AFS Enhancements Contents: Third-Party Order Subcontracting Purchase-to-Order (PTO) EDI .

you will be able to: Describe the third-party order processing Create a subcontracting order for a finished product with a BOM Describe the purchase-to-order processing Name the AFS IDOC message types specific to MM Describe the process of creating information structures to handle information down to SKU level © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 6-3 .Special Business Processes and Additional AFS Enhancements: Unit Objectives After completing this course.

The vendor issues an invoice. omit steps 1 and 6. The goods receipt is needed to close the requirement. 4. The invoice is entered in the system in logistics invoice verification. third party orders can be handled in Materials Management (MM). In this case. 3. who then sends the goods directly to the customer and the invoice to your company. 5. The system automatically creates a purchase requisition item for each third-party item in the sales order. If you do not use SD. © SAP AG ICP320 6-4 . Enter a third-party item in the sales order. your company passes on a sales order to an external supplier or "third party". A billing document is created in Sales and Distribution (SD). While it is optional in the standard ERP System.Third-Party Order Processing Own Company 6 Billing Document Invoice 5 4 1 Sales Order ‘TAS‘ 2 Purchase Order Statistical Goods Receipt 3 Delivery Customer © SAP AG 2008 Vendor In third-party order processing. Enter a purchase order with a third party item with reference to the third-party requisition item. 6. The vendor supplies the goods to the customer. 2. it is mandatory in AFS. A statistical goods receipt is posted in Inventory Management. Third-party order processing consists of the following steps: 1. You have to select the item category TAS for the sales order.

© SAP AG ICP320 6-5 . delivery dates. and account assignment cannot be changed in the purchase requisition. Quantities. you must select the item category TAS. To use third-party order processing with SD for AFS materials. The purchase requisition is assigned to the sales order.Third-Party Order Processing with SD Order Customer Availability Check Item Category TAS Grouping of Requirements Purchase Requisition Item Category S Release Procedure Account Assignment Category X © SAP AG 2008 Purchase requisition items within a purchase requisition are automatically generated for all order items within a sales order. Changes to the order are also automatically made to the purchase requisition provided that the latter's release status allows this.

When the purchase order is produced. the delivery address is printed once in the header (provided that the address is the same for all items). If the delivery addresses for the items differ. Third-party items must have an account assignment. the relevant address is printed for each item. In the ERP System. account assignment category X (all auxiliary account assignments) is used.Third-Party Order Processing without SD Third-Party Requisition Category 001A Conditions Third-Party Purchase Order Item Category Account Assignment Category Category 001A S Schedule Lines Account Assignment Texts X Additional Data Ordering Party's Delivery Address © SAP AG 2008 Third-party items in requisitions or purchase orders are identified by the item category S. © SAP AG ICP320 6-6 .

The subcontractor's invoice is entered with reference to the subcontracting purchase order. The subcontractor is issuing the finished product / semi-finished product and your company will post a goods receipt respectively. A subsequent adjustment for excess consumption or under-consumption of the components is possible. During the goods receipt the components provided to the subcontractor are consumed.Subcontracting Process Subcontract Purchase Order Our Plant Provision of Components Subcontracting Vendor Goods Receipt Delivery Invoice Manufacturing Invoice Verification © SAP AG 2008 A subcontracting purchase order is created to get an entire finished product manufactured at a subcontractor or to outsource a specific operation or service to a subcontractor. The components are issued to the subcontractor. © SAP AG ICP320 6-7 . However the components of the Bill of Material (BoM) are provided to the subcontractor by your own company.

In the subcontracting info record on the AFS Additional data screen the ‘Preferred Subcontracting Indicator’ can be set.Subcontract Items in the Purchase Order Subcontractor Information Record Info Category: Subcontracting Preferred Subcontracting Indicator: Category 001A Purchase Order Item Category L Subcontractor Component Component Subcontractor Component Component Category 001A Reservation for Purchase Order X Purchase Requisition Item Category L Standard Subcontractor BOM © SAP AG 2008 The subcontracting items in purchasing documents have their own item category (L). The purchase order price is the vendor's subcontracting service. Conditions for subcontracting purchase orders can be stored in a subcontracting purchasing info record (use info category Subcontracting). Each subcontracting item has one or several sub-items which contain the components that are to be provided to the vendor. This flag indicates that this material normally is subcontracted by the vendor. A warning message is displayed when this flag is set and the material is not subcontracted (item category 'L'). © SAP AG ICP320 6-8 . In the material master of the subcontracted product the Special Procurement Type 30 (Subcontracting) in the MRP 2 view can be set. Following options are available: Enter the components manually in the Purchase Order Determine the components using BOM (Bill of Material) explosion The system automatically creates reservation items for MRP-relevant components.

ATP for Components ATP Result ATP Overview ATP Result Explain ATP ATP Overview Explain ATP Explain ATP Order No Item Stock No Slot S. Date R.Subcontracting Orders . The availability of the components can be analyzed. © SAP AG ICP320 6-9 . Date Quantity Grid value © SAP AG 2008 ATP check can be executed in the subcontracting purchase order. All checks are done at the SKU Level including grid and category values.

Components can only be withdrawn from the stock of material provided by the vendor. This stock is valuated and available for MRP. © SAP AG ICP320 6-10 . It is not allocated to a specific storage location. Components can be issued with or without delivery (SD delivery document).Provision of Components Category 001A Distribution Center Plant Special Stock: Parts provided to vendor Storage Location Provision of components Unrestricted Use Subcontracting Vendor LOH1 Available for MRP = = Valued Category 001A © SAP AG 2008 The provision of components can be done in the subcontracting stock monitor (Transaction: ME2O). The components at the subcontractor's site are managed in a special stock for the vendor.Subcontracting Orders .

Partially confirmed quantities are highlighted in yellow.0 release the new transaction ‘Missing Parts List for Purchase Orders’ is available (/AFS/MM_MP). © SAP AG ICP320 6-11 .Purchase Order Missing Parts List © SAP AG 2008 With AFS 5. The list displays purchase orders that have subcontracting items.

© SAP AG ICP320 6-12 .Goods Receipt Subcontracting Vendor Category 001A Goods Receipt of Subcontracted Material Purchase Order Components Purchase Order History Goods Receipt of Subcontracted Material 1. The proposed consumption quantity of the components can be adjusted while entering the goods receipt. It is also possible to adjust the component consumption subsequently. Component Consumption SEMI FERT Distribution Category Center 001A RAW © SAP AG 2008 The goods receipt of the subcontracted material is entered with reference to the subcontracting purchase order. The consumption of the components is posted at goods receipt for the subcontracted material. Goods Receipt of Material 2.Subcontracting Orders .

Subcontracting order and provision of available components. © SAP AG ICP320 6-13 . you can specify the delivery address of your subcontracting vendor for delivery in the respective purchase order. 5.Subcontracting . This process is made up of the following steps: 1.Third-Party Provision of Components External Supplier 3 Subcontracting Vendor 2 4 1 5 6 Our Company © SAP AG 2008 If you do not provide the components yourself. Invoice from subcontracting vendor. 3. Invoice from external supplier. 2. Goods receipt for subcontracting order. Goods Receipt of material provided by external supplier to subcontract vendor. Open external deliveries of components are listed in the subcontracting monitor (ME2O). 6. When the goods are received. but order them from another supplier. Purchase order to external supplier for other material required with delivery to the subcontract vendor. 4. the components will be posted directly to the stock of material provided to the vendor.

In a purchase-to-order strategy.Purchase-to-Order (1) Sales Order A product is purchased specifically for an individual sales order. The sales order is planned individually and maintained in an individual segment (E) in the MRP list on the tab strip N. purchasing is initiated by a sales order. If the product would be manufactured internally the make-to-order procedure would be initiated for individual production of a product for a specific customer order. © SAP AG ICP320 6-14 . In the MRP list on the tab strip N Stock w/o MRP assignment a segment E is created for the purchase-toorder procedure Purchasing © SAP AG 2008 For the Purchase-to-Order procedure each product is specifically purchased for the individual customer order. The sales order quantities are planned for purchasing with reference to the sales order.

ARun ) Delivery © SAP AG 2008 The requirement is transferred by converting the purchase requisition into a purchase order. This purchase order is placed with a vendor. with ARun: in the customizing of the ARun rules the flag for “externally owned stock” needs to be set without ARun: in the customizing of the delivery item category TAB the flag “MTO/PTO w/o ARun” needs to be set (menu path see appendix) The customer stock is reduced when the sales order is delivered to the customer.Purchase-to-Order (2) Sales Order Purchasing Goods Receipt (pos. If the goods are received at the warehouse they are assigned to the special customer stock automatically. As stock is in the special customer stock segment it cannot be used to supply any other requirements than the specific customer sales order. In the case of a partial delivery. The Purchase-to-Order process can be done with or without using the AFS Allocation Run. © SAP AG ICP320 6-15 . the customer requirements are reduced correspondingly in the customer stock segment.

In the material master the item category group can be assigned to trigger the purchase-to-order process. If there is no definition in the material master the Purchase-to-Order scenario needs to be initiated by setting the corresponding item category / schedule line category in the sales order.Purchase-to-Order (3) Order Type Item Category Group Item Category Purchase-to-Order: TAB Schedule Line Category Purchase-to-Order: TAB CB © SAP AG 2008 The purchase-to-order scenarios are controlled by using certain item and schedule line categories. Procurement costs can be managed specifically for each sales order with special settings in the IMG in the requirement class for costing and account assignment. In former AFS releases two special item categories were defined for the PTO process: JPT2 valid w/o CO -> schedule line category J5 JPT3 valid with CO -> schedule line category J6 Both are still available in the AFS 5.0 system © SAP AG ICP320 6-16 .

Within the ERP System. or both. © SAP AG ICP320 6-17 . The IDoc format is valid as an EDI standard when used with EDI. ERP with ERP) or have them translated into other standards (for example.12) by EDI subsystems.not several EDI standards . The application which uses IDocs (for EDI or ALE) must be able to write data to IDocs. only IDoc formats are used. The advantage of this is that SAP applications only have to recognize the IDoc format . translating IDocs into other standards has the advantage of allowing communication with even more partners.EDI Scenario Document SAP ERP System IDoc IDoc SAP ERP System IDoc EDI Subsystem Message EDI Subsystem © SAP AG 2008 Two special IDoc application areas should be defined: EDI: electronic data interchange between different companies ALE: electronic data interchange between different systems within one company (Application Link Enabling) Systems can exchange IDocs either directly (for example. The disadvantage is that SAP does not supply an EDI subsystem and customers must purchase such a subsystem when other EDI standards are to be used. UN/EDIFACT or ANSI X. However. or read data from IDocs. All translations into other EDI Standards are performed by an EDI subsystem.making it easier to maintain.

sequence and frequency of use. This information is contained in the control section of the data records. which allows the application data to be structured. represented as a segment tree E1HDDOC M 1 E1TLSUM C 1 E1HDADR C 5 E1ITDOC Elternsegment M 1 E1ITSCH E1ITSCH C 99 C 5 Status Records © SAP AG 2008 Each business process (for example.EDI . An IDoc type is defined by the segments and their hierarchy. If such a structure contains application data. © SAP AG ICP320 6-18 . which includes the relevant data. an IDoc is created (the instance of the IDoc type). usually corresponds to a certain IDoc type. The segment hierarchy can be represented in tree form as parent and child segments.IDoc Types Control Record Data Records. Summary: IDoc types are special data structures for special applications or messages. a purchase order).

There are also some BAPI´s enhanced to support AFS functionality.IDocs & BAPI´s for AFS MM Outbound idocs: Message Type AFS IDOC Type Output Type Process Code Used for REQOTE ORDERS ORDCHG BLAORD BLAOCH Message Type /AFS/ORDERS05 /AFS/ORDERS05 /AFS/ORDERS05 /AFS/BLAORD03 /AFS/BLAORD03 AFS IDOC Type NEU NEU NEU J3AV J3AV Output Type ME12 ME10 ME11 /AFS/ME15 /AFS/ME16 Process Code Request for Quotation Purchase Order Purchase Order Change Contract Contract Changes Used for MM Inbound idocs: ORDRSP DESADV INVOIC BAPI: /AFS/ORDERS05 /AFS/DELVRY03 /AFS/INVOIC02 ORDR DELS INVL Purchase Order Conf.EDI . Inbound Delivery Invoice • BAPI_REQUISITION_CREATE • BAPI_REQUISITION_CHANGE • BAPI_PO_CHANGE • BAPI_PO_CREATE1 • /AFS/BAPI_PO_CREATE • /AFS/BAPI_PO_GETDETAIL © SAP AG 2008 Some IDoc types in the standard system have been adapted to support AFS functionality. Data is filled in the IDocs at SKU level. © SAP AG ICP320 6-19 .

.. These tables. which are transparent to the end user.. Statistical information is updated and aggregated around characteristics such as vendor. Logistics Information Warehouse Standard Info Structures Purchasing Sales/Distribution Production Self-defined Info Structures Factory Management Production/Sales AFS © SAP AG 2008 The individual physical tables in the SAP Information Warehouse are called information structures. Key Figure PO Quantity PO Value No. are described in the SAP Data Dictionary.. © SAP AG ICP320 6-20 . AFS info structures contain the AFS specific characteristics grid value and category. Easy-to-use tools also allow you to group characteristics and key figures together to suit your needs.... resulting in self-defined info structures which can then be supplied with data via separate update programs.. customer. of Deliveries Last Purchase Order . or material. There are two AFS info structures which are part of the Customer Shipment: S430 AFS Sales and Distribution S433 AFS Purchasing Info structure Characteristics are those properties which categorize data within information structures.Logistics Data Warehouse Info Structure: Purchasing Characteristics Plant Material Vendor .. Grid Value Category Period Unit Mont h Week Day .

) © SAP AG ICP320 6-21 .. calculate specific key figures from the data and write these key figures in aggregate form to the respective information structure at regular intervals... Information Structure Update Rules MCEKKO MCEKPO MCEKET Purchase Order EKKO EKPO EKET © SAP AG 2008 LIS Interface EKET EKPO EKKO Application An information structure is usually a statistical catchment area for individual or multiple business transactions.Information Structures Standard Analysis Analysis Program S012 Application 02 Purchasing Type: Standard S012/SAP Qty Value .. MCLIPS.. These copy data from the document that has been posted. J_4SKAT (Category) or J_3ASZGR (Price Group) have been appended to the most important Standard Communication Structures (MCEKET. Information structures of the type "standard" have one or more update programs. The system generates update programs and standard analyses in accordance with your specifications. . LIS-Interface: AFS-specific fields like J_3ASIZE (Grid Value)... MCVBEP.

along with a database table For menu paths. EKORG LIFNR MATNR J_3ASIZE J_4KSCAT Key Figures Purch. Add new characteristics from AFS field catalogs (JAFC. for example: Grid value (J_3ASIZE) Season (J_3ASEAN) Category (J_4KRCAT) Select key figures. JBCO. for example: Order quantity Quantity of goods received Generate a new information structure: The system automatically creates the description for a transparent table in the Data Dictionary. © SAP AG ICP320 6-22 .Maintain Self-Defined AFS-Information Structures (1) FIELD CATALOGS Field Vendor Order quantity Stock Transfer Qty Source Field MCEKKO-LIFNR MCEKET-MENGE MCEKET-MENGE Reference Field MCEKKO-LIFNR MCEKKZ-MENGE ZAMCEKKZ-UBMNG Info Structure S5nn Application 02 ck Pi Characteristics Purch. S012 Purchasing): The elements of the reference structure are then automatically copied to the new information structure.. Organization Vendor Grid Value Category Trans. Order Quantity Net Value up Stock Transfer Quantity Generate DDIC © SAP AG 2008 Naming convention for self-defined information structures: Assign a name which falls between S501 and S999 You can copy a standard system information structure (for example. see Appendix. Table S5nn . You can make changes to these proposals.. JEKE). JVAC.

.. Key Figures .. © SAP AG ICP320 6-23 .. weekly) to indicate when you want the information structure to be updated. see Appendix. Rules for key figures © SAP AG 2008 Create Updating Rules: Determines when updating should take place (for example. Activate the updating: Choose the period unit (for example.Maintain Self-Defined AFS-Information Structures (2) Updating for incoming order quantity Information Structure Update Group S5nn SAP Characteristics Source Table Source Field Key Figures .. Quantity Event Date Field Source Field . Rules for charact.. when a purchase order is created)... Information Structure Update Group Updating for Key Figure Quantity Update type Cumulative Purch. If possible. Quantity Vendor Material Grid Value Category S5nn SAP MCEKKO MCEKPO MCEKET MCEKET MCEKKO MATNR J_3ASIZE J_4KSCAT . For menu paths.... PO items).. Determines whether key figures should be cumulated (for example... order amount) or countered (for example. copy the updating rules from a standard system information structure. Generate the updating. Choose the update type (asynchronous updating is recommended). Order PO date MCEKPO-.

6 BLK 6 RED 6 BLK Cat.06 05. If no data record exists in the information structure for the characteristics combination of the document.From Document to Analysis Purchase Order Vendor: 1000 PO Date: 05/15/06 10 pair Shoes 6 BLK Cat. The different analyses can generate lists for all kinds of characteristics combinations (including grid value and category) using data stored in the information structures.the key figures of the information structures of the corresponding characteristics combinations are updated.06 PO Quantity 13500 32200 12700 Material Grid Value Category PO Quantity Shoes 6 BLK 001A 135000 Shoes 6 RED 001A 322000 © SAP AG 2008 When a document is posted – as shown here in the above example of a purchase order . If the characteristics combination already exists in the info structure.: 001A Month: 05/06 Vendor 1000 1100 PO Quantity 13500 12700 Vendor: Month: 1000 05/06 Info Structure in Purchasing Vendor 1000 1000 1100 Material Shoes Shoes Shoes Grid V. the key figures in the data line are increased or decreased. © SAP AG ICP320 6-24 . 001A 001A 001A Month 05. a new record is generated and the characteristics and key figures are entered.: 6 BLK Cat. 001A @ 110 1100 10 pair Shoes 6 RED Cat. 001A @ 100 1000 Material: Shoes Grid V.06 05.

Special Business Processes and Additional AFS Enhancements: Unit Summary

You should now be able to:
Describe the third-party order processing procedure in AFS Create a subcontract order for a finished product with a BOM Describe the prerequisites for using purchase-toorder Name the AFS IDOC message types specific to MM Describe the process of creating information structures to handle information down to SKU level

© SAP AG 2008

© SAP AG

ICP320

6-25

© SAP AG

ICP320

6-26

Exercise
Optional
Unit: Topic:
• • • • •

Special Business Processes and Other Enhancements Subcontracting

At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to: Create a subcontract order for a finished product with BOM Check ATP for the components Provide the subcontractor with the components they need to manufacture the finished product Post a goods receipt for the finished product Monitor the stock overview list

As you do not want to produce the casual coat TM-COAT## within your company GLOBAL FASHION, you use subcontract order processing. You provide your vendor VENDOR3-## with the components needed to manufacture 100 white coats in size 10 and 100 black coats in size 12. As soon as the subcontractor has finished the coats, they will be sent to your plant. The BOM of the coat contains the self material TM-SELF## (AFS material with another grid as header material), a lining TM-LINING## (AFS material with another grid as the header material), and some buttons TM-BUTTON## (AFS material without grid). 1-1 Run through the complete Subcontracting Process: 1-1-1 Check the BOM of end product TM-COAT## and the components that are used to subcontract 100 white coats in size 10 and 100 black coats in size 12. Data Material Plant BOM usage BOM Application TM-COAT## 0001 1 PP01

© SAP AG

ICP320

6-27

Fill in the information in the following table: Component TM-SELF## TM-SELF## Grid Value Quantity coat Quantity Quantity - 100 white coats size 10WHT coat 12BLK 10 & 100 black coats size 12 WHT BLK

TM-LINING## WHT TM-LINING## BLK TMBUTTON## 1-1-2 --Create a purchasing info record for your vendor VENDOR3 -## and your material TM-COAT##. Maintain the standard quantity and the net price. The planned delivery times can be maintained in the AFS additional data screen. Save your purchasing info record. Data Purchasing organization Plant Info category Standard quantity Net price Replenishment lead time Manufacturing lead time Packing lead time Transportation lead time Capacity offset lead time Complexity factor 0001 0001 Subcontracting 10 5 (USD) 5 3 1 5 2 80

Set the preferred subcontracting indicator. Note the info record number: _________________________ 1-1-3 Create a subcontract order for 100 white coats in size 10 and 100 black coats in size 12. This order also contains the components the subcontractor needs to manufacture the finished products. Display the components and their quantity in the purchase order and check ATP. Data Vendor Purchasing organization Purchasing group Item category Plant Material VENDOR3-## 0001 001 L (Subcontracting) 0001 TM-COAT##

Note the number of the subcontract order: _________________________

© SAP AG

ICP320

6-28

1-1-4

In the purchasing subcontracting report, you can provide the components to the subcontractor. The subcontractor manufactures the end products using these components. Check the stock for the components. Data Vendor Purchasing organization Material Plant Material TM-SELF## TM-SELF## TM-LINING## TM-LINING## TM-BUTTON## Grid Value WHT BLK WHT BLK --VENDOR3-## 0001 TM-COAT## 0001 Stock

Post a goods issue of the components from your stock to the stock of material provided to the vendor. Monitor the stock of material provided to the vendor. Fill in the information in the following table: Material TM-SELF## TM-SELF## TM-LINING## TM-LINING## TM-BUTTON## 1-1-5 Grid Value WHT BLK WHT BLK --SC stock VENDOR

Post a goods receipt for the finished products with reference to the purchase order. At the same time, the system posts the consumption of the components. Monitor the stock of your plant 0001. Data Movement type Purchase order Plant Storage location 101 Your purchase order number 0001 0001

© SAP AG

ICP320

6-29

Fill in the information in the following form: Material TM-COAT## TM-COAT## TM-SELF## TM-SELF## TM-LINING## TM-LINING## TM-BUTTON## 1-1-6 Grid Value WHT BLK WHT BLK WHT BLK --Stock in plant 0001

Only 12 buttons are used for one coat. Adjust the consumption for this order (2400 are used instead of 2600).

© SAP AG

ICP320

6-30

Exercise
Optional
Unit: Topic:
• • • •

Special Business Processes and Other Enhancements Third-Party Order (Direct Shipment)

At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to: Create a sales order for a direct shipment (a third-party purchase requisition will be created automatically) Create a third-party purchase order referring to the third-party purchase requisition Post an invoice referring to the purchase order using Logistics Invoice Verification Create a billing document referring to the sales order

Your American customer CUST-USA orders 1000 pieces of blue T-shirts TM-SHIRT## of size XL. Because your vendor TM-SUPPA## (who normally produces these T-shirts) is located near this customer, you decide to pass on the order to this vendor who will dispatch the required T-shirts directly to your customer. After the vendor has sent the invoice to your company, you will charge the customer. 2-1 Run through the complete Third-Party Order process 2-1-1 Create a sales order for your customer CUST-USA. Data Order Type: Sales Organization: Distribution Channel: Division: Sales Office: Sales Group: Customer: Purchase Order No.: RqDlv.date: OR 0001 01 01 <blank> <blank> CUST-USA PO## Today

Because the material TM-SHIRT## is usually not sold by use of third-party orders, you have to maintain the item category TAS in the Item overview manually. Also manually enter the net value after getting the incompletion log with condition type J3AP for the respective size/color. Note the number of the sales order: ____________________________ 2-1-2 A third-party purchase requisition with item category S is created automatically. Note the number of the purchase requisition: _____________________

© SAP AG

ICP320

6-31

2-1-3

Convert the purchase requisition into a purchase order. Data Vendor TM-SUPPA##

Note the number of the purchase order: ________________________ 2-1-4 After your vendor TM-SUPPA## has notified that he has delivered the orders goods directly to your customer, you have to create a statistical goods receipt to close the requirement: Data Movement Type: Purchase Order: 2-1-5 101 your purchase order number

The vendor has issued an invoice referring to your purchase order. Enter the invoice into the system. Use Logistics Invoice Verification: Data Document date: Purchase Order: Company Code: Amount: Today your purchase order number 0001 30,000 USD

Note the number of the invoice document: ________________________ 2-1-6 Create a billing document for your customer referring to your sales order. Note the number of the billing document: __________________________

© SAP AG

ICP320

6-32

Solution
Optional
Unit: Topic:
1-1 1-1-1 To check the BOM select: Logistics → Production → Master data → Bills of material → Bill of Material → Material BOM →Display Enter TM-COAT##, plant 0001 and BOM usage 1. Use the <SKU data> button for displaying values at SKU level. Component Grid Value Quantity Quantity Quantity for 100 white per coat per coat coats size 10 and 100 10WHT 12BLK black coats size 12 2,4 2,5 1,8 1,9 13 13 240 250 180 190 2600

Special Business Processes and Other Enhancements Subcontracting

TM-SELF## TM-SELF## TM-LINING## TM-LINING## 1-1-2

WHT BLK WHT BLK

TM-BUTTON## ---

Create an info record for the material TM-COAT## and the vendor VENDOR3##. Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Master data → Info record → Create Key in the number of the material and of the vendor. Set the Info category to Subcontracting. Maintain the required data. <Purch. Org. date 1>. Press the button <SKU data> and <AFS Additional Data> to maintain the lead times and set the preferred subcontracting indicator. Data Replenishment lead time Manufacturing lead time Transportation lead time Packing lead time Capacity offset lead time Complexity factor 10 15 1 10 2 80

© SAP AG

ICP320

6-33

1-1-3

To create a subcontract order select: Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Purchase Order → Create → Vendor known Enter the required data. In the Item Overview screen key in the material TMCOAT## and the quantity 200 (100 10WHT and 100 12BLK). The BOM is automatically exploded. To display the components and check availability select the item from the item overview and press the <component availability> button.

1-1-4

To provide the components to the subcontractor select: Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Purchase Order → Reporting → SC stocks per vendor Enter the data as described. Vendor: VENDOR3-## Plant: 0001 To check the stock for the components: Execute and expand all. Flag a component and press the <Stock overview> button (make sure the PO is selected). To post a goods issue of the components select all components and press the <Goods issue> button. Enter the storage location 0001 and choose the right batch number (grid value) confirm the defaulted quantity for all components.

1-1-5

To post a goods receipt for the finished products select: Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management → Goods Movement → Goods Movement MIGO. Enter the data as described. Save the document. Go to Stock Overview (TC: MMBE) to check the stock of your components in plant 0001. Material TM-COAT## TM-COAT## TM-SELF## TM-SELF## TM-LINING## TM-LINING## TM-BUTTON## Grid Value WHT BLK WHT BLK WHT BLK --Stock in plant 0001 100 100 760 750 820 810 7400

1-1-6

To adjust the consumption select: Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management → Goods Movement → Subsequent adjustment → Subcontracting Enter your PO number, copy both lines and adjust with -100 for every SKU. Save by Copy and ignore the message.

© SAP AG

ICP320

6-34

Solution
Optional
Unit: Topic:
2-1

Special Business Processes and Other Enhancements Third-Party Order (Direct Shipment)

Run through the complete Third-Party Order process 2-1-1 To create a sales order select: Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Order → Create Enter Order Type and the other data, go to tabstrip AFS item overview, double click on the delivery date and enter the quantity with grid value BLU XL. Now click the tabstrip item overview and enter item category TAS. Save. Manually enter the net value after getting the incompletion log with condition type J3AP for the respective size/color. 2-1-2 A third-party purchase requisition with item category S is created automatically. Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Order → Display Mark your item in the AFS Item overview; go to the Menu: Goto→ Item→ Schedule lines and you see the Purchase Requisition number. 2-1-3 To convert the purchase requisition into a purchase order select: Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Purchase Order → Create → Vendor known → drag requisition into the shopping basket 2-1-4 To post a statistical goods receipt select: Logistics → Materials management → Inventory management → Goods movement → Goods receipt MIGO 2-1-5 To enter the invoice select: Logistics → Materials management → Logistics invoice verification → Document Entry → MIRO Enter invoice 2-1-6 To create a billing document select: Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Billing → Billing document → Create

© SAP AG

ICP320

6-35

© SAP AG

ICP320

6-36

Product Forecasting Planning: Course Content

Preface Unit 1 Unit 2 Unit 3 Unit 4 Unit 5 Unit 6 Unit 7 Unit 8 Unit 9 Unit 10 Course Overview Master Data Procurement Inventory Management Invoice Verification Special Business Processes Product Forecasting Planning MRP Production Conclusion Appendices

© SAP AG 2008

© SAP AG

ICP320

7-1

Production Forecasting and Planning Contents: Transfer of Planning Data to AFS Demand Management Presizing and Mapping © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 7-2 .

you will be able to: Transfer requirements from planning into AFS demand management Run presizing for planned independent requirements Describe the difference between distribution profiles and mapping profiles © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 7-3 .Production Forecasting and Planning: Unit Objectives After completing this course.

Product Forecasting and Planning: Course Overview Diagram AFS Master Data Material Grids Categories Material Master Customer Master Vendor Master Bill of Materials Pricing Value Added Services Seasons Sales and Distribution Sales MRP Procurement Allocation Run Delivery Billing Sales Information System Procurement Purchase Source Purchase Requisition Allocation Order Warehouse Management Production SOP MRP Markers Valuation/ Production Production Product Order Lots Costing Goods Receipt Routing Planned Order Invoice Verification AFS specific functionality ERP Standard functionality with AFS enhancements © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 7-4 .

we need to plan on components and capacities by creating independent requirements for a track shoe. before sales data has been accumulated.Production Forecasting and Planning: Business Scenario At the start of the season. From past sales figures. we know how to distribute the requirements across the size range © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 7-5 .

please refer to the APO chapter). Historical sales figures can be used as input for planning future demand. eg. (With SCM 5. © SAP AG ICP320 7-6 .like capacity and available stock of raw materials .are taken into account.0 for DP it’s possible to set up the planning on SKU level. production plans can be developed and checked for feasibility. distribution profiles for spreading the requirements may be used. Costs of the production orders are calculated and posted for order settlement. therefore the planning figures need to be drilled down to SKU level for AFS materials. The following production planning procedures are supported by AFS: Sales and Operations Planning (SOP) Flexible Planning Advanced Planning and Optimizer. regarding capacities. Planned independent requirements on SKU level are created.0 / AFS 5. All these procedures are planned on material level.Production Planning and Execution Presizing Mapping Sales Operation Planning Flexible Planning APO Forecasting (Advanced Planning Optimizer) Sales Planning Production Planning Production Settlement Demand Management MRP Manufacturing Execution Order Settlement Capacity Production Master Data Reporting and Analysis © SAP AG 2008 Inventory Costing The production cycle can be initiated by planned demand.Demand Planning (APO-DP. Based on the sales planning. Material Requirements Planning (MRP) can take care of the procurement based on the planned independent requirements. Incoming sales orders can consume the planned independent requirements.) The planning figures are transferred to AFS Demand Management and broken down to the SKU level for AFS materials. For manufacturing execution factors .

The relevant planning is level-by-level planning.Sales and Operations Planning (SOP) SOP provides a method for: Sales planning Production planning Feasibility assessment Sales plan Production plan QUANTITY Capacity estimate Stock May June TIME July © SAP AG 2008 The SOP and Flexible Planning components are planning tools within the ERP logistics area. Planning in SOP and Flexible Planning can only be done at material level – dimensions and categories are not supported in these planning tools. AFS also supports the transfer of demand from flexible planning. the version best fitting the expected situation must be selected and copied as the active version. These planning methods are based on information structures. An information structure is a statistic file containing operational data. This can be either future planning data or actual data that happened in the past. © SAP AG ICP320 7-7 . AFS supports the ERP Standard SOP based on the standard information structure S076. Once the planning figures are transferred to demand management. Planning simulation can be done in different versions.

Transfer Planning Data to AFS Demand Management APO-DP SOP / Flexible Planning Material Level ERP Standard AFS SKU Level Transfer of Planning Data to Demand Management Quality 1 2 3 Planned Independent Requirements © SAP AG 2008 Planning figures can be transferred for individual materials or product groups into AFS Demand Management. The requirements are taken over into AFS Demand Management as Planned Independent Requirements on SKU level. © SAP AG ICP320 7-8 . The distribution of the requirements to SKU level is done by taking distribution profiles into account which need to be defined before the transfer of the planning figures. Distribution profiles can be created manually or by mapping historical data. While transferring the planning data to AFS Demand Management the planning figures on material level need to be broken down to SKU level.

If no distribution profile was maintained for a material. the requirements will be distributed evenly across the SKU’s. Disaggregation stands for distribution of the planning figures of the product group to the lower levels while taking into account the defined rations for the SKU’s. The disaggregation is initiated by the user. The planning figures are then disaggregated down to the next level and finally to the material level. AFS Demand Planning © SAP AG 2008 Planning can be executed starting from a high-level viewpoint by using product groups. For distribution of the requirements to SKU level distribution profiles are used while transferring the planning data to AFS Demand Management.Disaggregation and Presizing Production Forecasting Product Group 1 TRACK SHOES Disaggregation Style Atlanta Presizing Distribution Profile Quality Style Sydney Distribution Profile 1 2 3 4 5 6 etc. The process of using distribution profiles for generating requirements on SKU level is called presizing. 4 5 6 etc. © SAP AG ICP320 7-9 . Planning is done at material level only.

they are applied automatically when carrying out presizing – given the distribution profiles are assigned in the material master and the requirements are within the SKU Level horizon. Planned independent requirements may originate from various sources where planning is done on material level. The order of applied profiles is fixed: client level -> plant level -> category level -> dimension level Once distribution profiles have been defined.Presizing (1) Planned Independent Requirements Presizing Client Client Level Plant External Planning and Forecast Plant Level Plant Category Category Grid Category Level Dimension Level © SAP AG 2008 The presizing functionality is used to distribute planned independent requirements from the highest organizational level all the way down to SKU level. © SAP AG ICP320 7-10 .

period distribution profiles are applied to spread the requirements according to a specified distribution within a timeframe. Periods need to be defined in Customizing. A period profile defines the distribution of requirements during a certain period. © SAP AG ICP320 7-11 . the ratio of weighting is defined which is used for multiplying the requirements in order to generate corresponding planned independent requirements. eg.Presizing (2) Client Level 1000 pc 50% 50% Planned Independent Requirements material level Plant 0001 500 pc Plant 0002 500 pc Presizing applying distribution rules 60% Category DOM 300 pc 40% Category EXP 200 pc Distributed Requirements S BLK ratio 20 M BLK ratio 20 M BLU ratio 30 SKU level Presizing requirement dates © SAP AG 2008 period profile Presizing spreads requirements to plants.: consumers usually spend more money at the beginning of a month than towards the end of a month. categories and dimensions according to defined distribution profiles. eg. The planned total of requirements for a month is then split into weeks or days according to the defined ratio in the period profile. Period profiles allow the simulation of time-dependent customer habits. For each part. Finally. The period is split into parts. four parts for a month.

presizing is run by using distribution profiles created before the requirements are distributed from material level to SKU level. © SAP AG ICP320 7-12 .Distribution to SKUs (3) Transfer to AFS Demand Management SOP / Flexible Planning Sales Information System External System Planned Independent Requirements Sales Order Mapping Request for Quotation Multi-level Contract Presizing Run Purchase Requisition Purchase Order Distribution Profile Manual Setup © SAP AG 2008 Planning tables are supplied with information from the sales information system. presizing uses an even spread to create the requirements on SKU level.generally. Sales and operations planning (SOP) and flexible planning are carried out at material level.Presizing . While the planning data is transferred to AFS Demand Management. Distribution profiles can either be set up manually or can be created by the mapping process based on data of the Sales Information System (SIS). If no distribution profiles were defined. external systems or manually. Distribution profiles can also be used in the documents listed above for break-down of requirement totals on material level to SKU level .

Material-dependent distribution profiles are assigned to the material automatically. or materialindependent profiles for a group of materials using the same grid. If no distribution profile was maintained. grid distribution profiles.-independent distribution profile AFS MRP Presizing Cat. and periods). profile Grid profile Period profile TP-SPREAD Mat. depending which level (client or plant) they apply to. for one material. the requirements are spread evenly across the respective levels (plants. such as Purchasing or Sales. profile Grid profile Period profile © SAP AG 2008 You can maintain distribution profiles. The default version of a profile for individual applications. e. dimensions. categories.g. © SAP AG ICP320 7-13 .Assigning Distribution Profiles in Material Master AFS basic data Presizing Plant profile Cat. can be assigned to the material master record either in the AFS Basic Data or AFS MRP view.

© SAP AG ICP320 7-14 . For the distribution profiles at plant or category level a corresponding percentage needs to be defined for distribution of the requirements between valid plants and/or categories. In the above example. the ratio 1:2:2:1 is entered.3% 33.7% 600 600 300 © SAP AG 2008 In order to calculate the distribution of requirements at SKU level. you can define a ratio between different grid values.Distribution of Requirements Distribution: Examples for Grid Values Total Quantity: 1800 pieces S 1 16. and the system calculates the percentages for distribution accordingly.7% 300 M 2 L 2 XL 1 33.3% 16.

© SAP AG ICP320 7-15 . periods. information structure S430) is used as a basis. a style from a previous season may be used as reference to generate distribution profiles for a future style. Mapping profiles can be based on the SIS history of several other materials. categories and dimensions. Mapping profiles define which source information is mapped to which target information (materials or distribution profiles) – the ratio of SKU’s for the distribution profiles are then created referring to the historical data defined in the mapping profiles. The distribution of requirements on different levels can be determined based on the sales figures of one or several reference materials existing in the past. plants. For example.Mapping Mapping Profiles Distribution Profiles Source Product 1 Product 2 Product x Size Size Size S M L Target Product A Product B Product x M L XL . Sales data gathered in the Sales Information System (SIS.. SIS history Size M Size L Size XL © SAP AG 2008 The Mapping process enables the definition of distribution profiles based on historical sales data.

The time-range as well as the desired mapping profile needs to be entered before the system refers to the historical source data for calculation of the ratios for the distribution profile. materials. grid values and periods. You can maintain mapping profiles for plants. © SAP AG ICP320 7-16 .2000 AFS Grid mapping profile Source L L M M S XL Percent 100 50 50 20 80 100 © SAP AG 2008 Mapping profiles are maintained in Production Planning – AFS Profiles. the sales data of the grid values are used as the basis for the calculation of a distribution profile. In the example above. categories.01. Once the mapping profile is maintained the corresponding distribution profile can be maintained with reference to the SIS data.Mapping Profiles Grid mapping profile Master grid Valid from date Mapping Target L M S XL TP-GRIDMAP JACKET 01.

Different settings for each target material can be set up for the data transfer. If Transfer to Size distribution is selected a material-dependent distribution profile is created using the historical sales quantities as ratios.Timeframe . Following processes are supported: calculation of the quantities of a material for a defined period on material or SKU level and transfer of the data in a planning version calculation of the distribution on SKU level for a material in a distribution profile For the transfer of data the information structure needs to be maintained with data.AFS Quantity and Distribution Calculation Distribution Profile ratio Selection Criteria for . Therefore the indicator Matl statistics gr on tab strip Sales: sales org. Various selection criteria can be defined for the source and target materials. © SAP AG ICP320 7-17 . The distribution calculation is a simplified option to use historical data when compared to the SIS calculation (Mapping).2002 Transfer of data S M RED WHT 5 10 10 25 ST ST ST ST 2XL BLK 2XL BLU © SAP AG 2008 Data of AFS information structure S430 can be used to calculate the distribution at grid value and category levels and to calculate planning requirements.Transfer to Preplanning . transfer of data on material or grid level. The Planned Independent Requirements are created accordingly. For the first step a structure of source and target materials must be set up.Transfer to Distribution S M RED WHT 5 10 10 25 2XL BLK 2XL BLU SIS 010 010 010 010 S430 S RED M WHT 2XLBLK 2XLBLU ST ST ST ST 5 10 10 25 MANDT J_3ASIZE BASEM AEMENGE Planned Independent Requirements M 07.g.2 needs to be set in the material master. If no specific grid value or category is defined you must enter an asterisk (*) in order to transfer all valid entries. percentage of increase or decrease of the historical planning figures etc. e. This function enables quick usage of historical data and transfer of the data into a corresponding planning version. period indicator.

Production Forecasting and Planning: Unit Summary You should now be able to: Transfer requirements from planning into AFS demand management Run presizing for planned independent requirements Describe the difference between distribution profiles and mapping profiles © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 7-18 .

Remember to leave the field for material blank when you create the profile.Exercise Unit: Topic: Production Forecasting and Planning Presizing At the conclusion of this exercise.5 10 10 5 Size Weighting Distribution profile Distribute requirements to Plant Category Validation period Version Master grid TP-## Grid values 0001 blank * 00 SHOE © SAP AG ICP320 7-19 . Data 4 5 4. 1-1 Create an independent distribution profile for the size range of your master grid SHOE.5 25 8 20 8. you will be able to: • • • • Create an independent distribution profile for the size range of the master grid Add the distribution profile to a material master Create independent requirements for the material Run presizing for the planned independent requirements At the start of the season when we have not yet accumulated sales data. TP-SHOE##.5 25 7 25 7.5 15 9 15 9.5 15 6 20 6. we know how to distribute the requirements across the size range. we create independent requirements for a track shoe. Save your data.5 5 5 15 5. but already need to plan on components. From past sales figures.

You can enter the distribution profile either on client level in the AFS Basic Data view or on plant level in the AFS MRP view. Data Material Industry sector Plant Material type Plant Sales organization Distribution channel Views Basic data 1 Basic data 2 AFS Basic data Master grid: Coverage strategy: AFS Status: Sales: Sales organization data 1 Sales: Sales organization data 2 Sales: General/plant data AFS Sales data Purchasing MRP1 MRP2 MRP3 AFS MRP Storage 1 Accounting 1 MRP4 Coverage strategy: AFS status MRP: none Yes SHOE none Yes TP-SHOE## F (Apparel and Footwear) 0001 Trading goods 0001 (copy from 0001) 0001 (copy from 0001) 01 (copy from 01) © SAP AG ICP320 7-20 .1-2 Create a material master for TP-SHOE## with reference to TP-SHOE.

Data Material Plant Category Version Planned quantity Save the data. Enter this quantity at material level (radio button) and save your data. but do not set active.200 pieces of TP-SHOE##. TP-SHOE## 0001 blank 00 Reqmts date M. © SAP AG ICP320 7-21 . You want to sell 1. 3 months in the future 1200 pairs 1-4 Run presizing for the planned independent requirements of TP-SHOE##. Data Source: Material Plant 0001 Distribute requirements to Output: Unflag simulation TP-SHOE## Grid values 1-5 Check the result of the presizing in the Overview screen of your planned independent requirements.1-3 Create planned independent requirements for your new material.

© SAP AG ICP320 7-22 .

Logistics → Production → Production Planning → Demand Management → AFS Planned Independent Requirements → Display Select SKU level for Display. AFS materials are created in the standard path. Assign the distribution profile just created in the AFS Basic Data view or on plant level in the AFS MRP view.200 pairs of TP-SHOE##. Remember to leave the field for material blank when you create the profile. 1-5 Check the result of the presizing in the Overview screen of your planned independent requirements. Enter this quantity at material level (radio button) and save your data. Production → Production Planning → AFS Profiles → Distribution Profiles → Maintain 1-2 Create a material master for TP-SHOE## with reference to TP-SHOE. Logistics → Production → Production Planning → Demand Management → AFS Planned Independent Requirements → Maintain 1-4 Run presizing for the planned independent requirements of TP-SHOE##.Solution Unit: Topic: Production Forecasting and Planning Presizing 1-1 Create an independent distribution profile for the size range of your master grid SHOE. You want to sell 1. You can enter the distribution profile either on client level in the AFS Basic Data view or on plant level in the AFS MRP view. Logistics → Production → Master data → Material master → Material → Create (general) → Immediately 1-3 Create planned independent requirements for your new material. Save your data. Logistics → Production → Production Planning→ AFS Profiles → Presizing Remember not to flag 'simulation'. Create a material independent distribution profile for the size range of your master grid SHOE and enter the weighting for the sizes of the master grid. By executing the presizing the weighting of the distribution profile was used to create the planned independent requirements on SKU level. Go back with green arrow. Exit function with yellow arrow. © SAP AG ICP320 7-23 .

© SAP AG ICP320 7-24 .

MRP: Course Content Preface Unit 1 Unit 2 Unit 3 Unit 4 Unit 5 Unit 6 Unit 7 Unit 8 Unit 9 Unit 10 Course Overview Master Data Procurement Inventory Management Invoice Verification Special Business Processes Product Forecasting Planning MRP Production Conclusion Appendices © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 8-1 .

Material Requirements Planning (MRP) Contents: Material Requirements Planning (MRP) Material Master Parameters for MRP Planning Execution Evaluation of Planning Results Analysis Tools & Reports Consumption of Planned Independent Requirements © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 8-2 .

you will be able to: Outline MRP procedures Outline the Material Master settings for MRP Execute MRP & outline planning options Evaluate the planning result using AFS MRP list & AFS Stock/Requirements list Analyze the planning results © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 8-3 .Material Requirements Planning: Unit Objectives After completing this course.

MRP: Course Overview Diagram AFS Master Data Material Grids Categories Material Master Customer Master Vendor Master Bill of Materials Pricing Value Added Services Seasons Sales and Distribution Sales MRP Procurement Allocation Run Delivery Billing Sales Information System Procurement Purchase Source Purchase Requisition Allocation Order Warehouse Management Production SOP MRP Markers Valuation/ Production Production Product Order Lots Costing Goods Receipt Routing Planned Order Invoice Verification AFS specific functionality ERP Standard functionality with AFS enhancements © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 8-4 .

Material Requirements Planning .Business Scenario Sales orders and planned independent requirements are being received Material Requirements Planning needs to make sure that all materials are available at the requested time Stock and planned receipts are compared with the requirements and resulting procurement proposals are created © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 8-5 .

If stock is needed then a planned order is created. A planned order consists of a suggested order quantity. the planned order needs to be converted to a production order (if it is for a manufactured item) – or to a purchase requisition (if it is for a purchased or subcontracted item). the dependent requirements for its components become reservations. The bill of material of the planned order is exploded. creating dependent requirements. a start date and a finish date. In order to replenish stock. When the planned order is converted to a production order.Standard ERP MRP Independent Requirements Sales and Distribution Processing Demand Management Dependent Requirements Reservations Planned Order Convert Production Order Order Settlement Release Execution Confirmation Warehouse Purchase Requisition Purchasing Functions Purchase Orders Schedule Lines Invoice Verification © SAP AG 2008 The main task of Material Requirements Planning is the timely procurement of materials to fulfill internal and external requirements in time. MRP analyzes the demand from sales orders and forecasts. Sales orders come in and forecasts of future sales are set up.MRP Overview . The logistical cycle starts in Sales and Production Planning. MRP can create purchase requisitions directly for purchased materials – depending on runtime settings. © SAP AG ICP320 8-6 . These are later processed by MRP.

The main task of the MRP in AFS is to guarantee the material availability at SKU level. P2.AFS Quality MRP Independent Requirements Quality Sales and Distribution Processing 1 2 3 1 2 3 Quality Dependent Requirements Reservations Planned Order Quality Demand Management Quality 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 Convert Quality Production Order Release Execution Confirmation Warehouse Quality Purchase Requisition Quality Purchasing 1 2 3 Functions Purchase Orders Schedule Lines Invoice Verification 1 2 3 Order Settlement 1 2 3 © SAP AG 2008 The AFS materials have characteristic values below the material level – grid values and categories. P3. AFS supports following special procurement keys: 30 Subcontracting 40 Stock transfer (proc. These characteristics identify the actual SKU – Stock Keeping Unit. P1. The AFS MRP uniquely assigns requirement quantities to available stock using grid values and categories and / or creates procurement proposals. X0 AFS supports the planning strategy 40 – Planning with final assembly. J1. Categories are dynamically assigned according to the definition in the coverage strategy. such as planned orders. at SKU level for nonexisting stock. Supported MRP types in AFS: PD. Both finished products and components are planned at SKU level. ND.MRP Overview . The allocation of grid values is not dynamic.from alter.plant) 70 Withdrawal from alternative plant 80 Production in alternative plant © SAP AG ICP320 8-7 .

MRP Interaction Standard MRP . © SAP AG ICP320 8-8 .AFS MRP Independent Requirement for AFS Material Sourcing Internal/External AFS MRP Inventory Management AFS STD AFS Dependent Requirement Dependent Requirements for Standard-Materials STD MRP © SAP AG 2008 AFS MRP is run for AFS materials using grid values and categories. Dependent requirements of standard materials are passed on to ERP Standard MRP automatically.

provided they share the same requirement date. each containing a dimension group. Flag: Single Grid Value For all values in a grid. AFS MRP Status – once this button is activated.Germany General Data MRP Basic Data 1 Coverage strategy Coat AFS MRP Status MRP Basic Data 2 SKU lvl horizon Consumption prio ATP/MRP Check Method SKU Round Quantity Act.AFS MRP View . AFS provides lot size keys which will result in the creation of several planned orders. If “single grid value” is flagged. SLH Method 2 Single Grid value Category higher than Requested Delivery Date 2 Level Rounding Coat © SAP AG 2008 There are standard views MRP1 to MRP4 – the settings on these views are valid on material level. an individual purchase/planned order is created for each grid value or SKU. Grid values or SKU´s might be grouped together as desired. For MRP of AFS materials this button needs to be active. By defining the same key for several dimensions a group is built – see slide Master Data – AFS MRP View – SKU data. © SAP AG ICP320 8-9 .General Data AFS MRP View Material Plant TM-COAT 0001 Trench-Coat Plant 0001 . the coverage strategy can no longer be changed. a single purchase/planned order will be created by default. AFS MRP View – General Data The settings on the AFS MRP View are valid on SKU level. regardless of the requirement date.Material Master .

The rounding level at SKU level is the same for all SKUs. MRP will first round at SKU level and then at material level. Flag: Act.SLH Meth.Flag: 2 Level Rounding / SKU Round quantity If two-level-rounding is activated.2 see slides AFS MRP SKU-Level-Horizon Method 1 and AFS MRP–SKU-Level-Horizon Method 2 Flag: Consumption Prio see slide AFS MRP – Consumption of Planned Independent Requirements by Sales Orders Flag: ATP/MRP-ChkMthd see slide AFS MRP – AFS MRP Search Method © SAP AG ICP320 8-10 . the material rounding value must be a multiple of the SKU rounding value.

Safety Stock can be defined either on material level or on SKU level. SKU group – SKU values can be combined into groups by assigning the same group name – SKU groups are only taken into account with the AFS specific lot size procedures X1-XC ! © SAP AG ICP320 8-11 .SKU Data AFS MRP View Material Plant TM-COAT 0001 Trench-Coat Plant 0001 . Rounding value can be entered either on material level or on SKU level.Material Master .lotsize 0 0 0 0 0 0 Round.value 0 0 0 0 0 0 SKU group AFS SKUstatus © SAP AG 2008 Attention: The fields of the coverage strategy and the dimensions need to be relevant – otherwise the maintenance of the characteristics on category level is limited on the AFS MRP view.AFS MRP View .Germany SKU Data MRP Additional Data Size 10 10 12 12 14 14 Color BLK WHT BLK WHT BLK WHT Safety stock 200 0 0 0 0 0 Min.

Please see AFS Online Help for details.AFS specific lot size procedures: Requirements Distribution Ratio (X1-X3): The percentage ratio between the total requirements quantity and the requirements quantity per SKU value is determined. SKU group Procedure 2 (XA-XC) – this procedure is used to optimize the cutting process by considering the material efficiency for size combinations in the marker. MRP: Further material planning can be stopped so no procurement proposals are created during MRP. © SAP AG ICP320 8-12 . The definition of the replenishment lead time can be based on SKU groups – it is possible to define a reference SKU value for the SKU group – the replenishment lead time of this reference SKU value is valid for the whole SKU group. AFS SKU status -> ATP / MRP Status for SKU´s ATP: ATP can be done on SKU level with respective replenishment lead times on SKU level. SKU group Procedure 1 (X4-X6) – corresponds to the lot-size procedure Requirements Distribution Ratio – but takes SKU groups into account. Procurement proposals are created during MRP. the quantity per SKU value is determined according to previously calculated percentage ratio. based on a time-period.

lot size on SKU-level max. The fixed lot size is calculated at material level. That’s why the warning message appears. (d) differing entries in these parameters are not allowed. lot size </= fixed lot size on material level OK Minimum lot size at SKU level is not supported when fixed lot size is maintained. an ERROR message is issued © SAP AG ICP320 8-13 . OK The first time we maintain a rounding value on SKU-level a warning message is issued regardless of whether it is less than or equal to the maximum lot size at material level. The check happens while entering the parameters in the material master – depending on the check results error and warning or information-messages that are shown. lot size on SKU-level OK OK ERROR message SKU min.Material Master . After rounding at SKU level the total quantity is checked against the maximum lot size. Even if minimum lot size is maintained at SKU level.AFS MRP View .Lot Size Procedures & Consistency Check Quality 1 2 3 Material level SKU level Minimum Lotsize Rounding Factor Safety Stock Minimum Lotsize Maximum Lotsize a c Fixed Lotsize b d Rounding Factor Safety Stock d d © SAP AG 2008 Some MRP parameters can be set at both the material and SKU level. summing up different dimensions. lot size on material level < rounding value on SKU-leve ERROR message max. The system needs to check whether both levels include consistent information. max. The maximum lotsize overrides the SKU level rounding. lot size on SKU-level max. MRP does not consider it while creating the stock proposal. lot size on material level > min. (c) max. lot size > fixed lot size on material level ERROR message SKU min. lot size on material level = min. lot size on material level < min. lot size on material level >/= rounding value on SKU-level WARNING.

Germany Discontinous Parts MRP Additional Data Color BLK WHT GRE Eff.08. Size 38 is followed by Size 38/40 – the follow-up material is the same as the original material – only the grid values differ.06. The discontinuation is implemented according to the ERP Standard logic: for planned independent requirements (header material) exception messages are created if discontinuation is defined for dependent requirements of components the requirements are assigned to the follow-up material automatically – existing stock of the original material is consumed first only dependent requirements or reservations are automatically redirected to the follow-up material Prerequisites are: AFS materials use same base unit of measure AFS materials use the same grid AFS materials use the same coverage strategy AFS materials can also be followed by a standard material at material level (MRP 4 View – Standard fields).AFS MRP View .2002 01.2002 15. The discontinuation can also be used if new grid values are added – eg.-out date Follow-up material 15.Cotton Plant 0001 .Discontinuation AFS MRP View Material Plant TM-Fabric-01 0001 Fabric for Shirts .2002 TM-FABRIC-02 TM-FABRIC-02 TM-FABRIC-01 Follow-up material BLK WHT PEA © SAP AG 2008 AFS supports discontinuation of materials at SKU level (AFS MRP View – Discontinuation Ctrl).08.Material Master . © SAP AG ICP320 8-14 .

: The sewing operation can be carried out in plant 5000 in March but in plant 4000 in April.Time-Phased Special Procurement Key MRP 2 Material Plant TM-COAT 0001 Trench-Coat Plant 0001 Insert a record Plant Material Procurement Start Date F End Date SpecProcurement Procuring Plant Coat 0001 TM-COAT F General Data MRP Basic Data 1 Procurement type Special procurement 40 Special procurement 7 01052002 30062002 40 0010 Execute report SOBSL Data Plant 0001 0001 /AFS/Maintain_SOBSL Enter time-dependent records P..06. AFS time-phased settings are defined by executing the report /AFS/Maintain_SOBSL (transaction se38). © SAP AG ICP320 8-15 . For Special Procurement Key 70.07.2002 S.2002 31. F F Material TM-COAT TM-COAT S. 7 7 Date 01. For Special Procurement Key 80. the material needs to exist in the supplying plant.Material Master ..05...AFS MRP View .2002 01.12..2002 Date 30. the bill of material needs to exist. The following special procurement keys can be maintained based on differing time phases: 40 (stock transfer – procurement from alternative plant) 70 (withdrawal from alternative plant) 80 (production in alternative plant) On MRP 2 view the Special Procurement Key is defined.. 40 40 Plant 0010 0005 © SAP AG 2008 Time phased Special Procurement Key settings are supported – eg.

Material Master . and the phantom assembly will be treated as a normal component. Example: The material TP-SHOE is manufactured in plant 0001 and in plant 0010. Plant 0010 is using the complete sole. © SAP AG ICP320 8-16 . If you delete a phantom item in a production order the components of the phantom item are deleted as well.Phantom Assembly Shoe (AFS Material) MRP Leather (AFS Material) Thread (AFS Material) Sole (AFS Material) Phantom Item No MRP Leather (AFS Material) Heel (AFS Material) MRP © SAP AG 2008 AFS supports phantom assemblies. The phantom item itself is not MRP relevant. The phantom assembly can be defined in the material master on plant level by using special procurement key 50. the sole is handled as a phantom item in this case. It is also possible to define the phantom assembly in the BOM. When applying phantom assemblies a BOM is exploded across all levels. if you add a phantom assembly to a planned order or a production order manually. Plant 0001 is producing the soles. You cannot change the quantity of the phantom assembly in a planned order or production order. Unlike ERP standard. BOM explosion will occur. MRP is executed for the components of the phantom item.

Planning Execution Plant AFS MRP: Online (Total Planning) AFS MRP: Background Processing (Total Planning) Plant AFS MRP: Online (AFS Single Item Planning) Material © SAP AG 2008 There are two ways to carry out planning in both SAP standard and AFS: TOTAL PLANNING . TOTAL PLANNING The SAP standard transaction can be used for planning both standard and AFS materials for one or several plants together.planning run for all materials of one or more plants (online / background) SINGLE-ITEM PLANNING . Due to the specific data structure of AFS materials the logic of requirement and stock allocation differs from SAP standard. parallel processing needs to be activated (customizing).planning run for one material (online).single or multi-level AFS MRP is based on a net requirements calculation – there are two options: Net change planning in the planning horizon Regenerative planning AFS materials are only planned through the end of the planning horizon – planning an entire horizon as in SAP standard is not supported.AFS MRP . The Parameter AFS MRP Search Method in the material master controls how categories and the customer´s requested delivery date are considered during stock allocation (see slide AFS MRP – AFS MRP Search Method). The total planning run updates the standard planning file MDVM for standard materials as well as for AFS materials © SAP AG ICP320 8-17 . To plan AFS materials in the total planning run.

AFS Filter and Sort/Compress can be used in combination. Compress: The function compress helps to compress the MRP list display according to different criteria. This planning run can be carried out at single-level or multilevel basis (flag the parameter Also plan unchanged for execution on multilevel). The planning run creates supply to meet demand (requirements). Requirement assignments to stock are saved in the assignment table. Start Screen Single-Item Planning User Dependent Settings: The parameter settings of the MRP entry screens can be saved.AFS MRP . such as stock and requirements category and grid values can be selected to reduce the amount of data displayed on the MRP list. With release 5. Grid value / Category filter: With the grid value / category filter AFS specific data.Single Item Planning MRP System Help Save settings MRP Settings Delete settings AFS MRP – Single Item / single-level / multi-level Compress Material Plant TM-COAT 0001 Old Stock/Requir. List AFS-MRP control parameters Create Pur. requisition Planning mode Scheduling 3 3 2 Planned Orders Delete and recreate planning data Lead time scheduling and capacity planning Process control parameters Also plan unchanged components Display MRP result Display material list © SAP AG 2008 SINGLE-ITEM PLANNING (single-level / multi-level) There is a separate planning run for the single-item planning of AFS materials. eg. To carry out a regenerative planning the MRP control parameter Planning mode needs to be set to reset planning data.0 the following transactions are replaced with new transactions: J3AD -> /AFS/MD02: AFS MRP Single-Item Planning J4AD -> /AFS/MD04: AFS Stock/Requirements List J4A ] -> /AFS/MD06: AFS Display of MRP list © SAP AG ICP320 8-18 .: Display all blue T-SHIRTS in quality 1A.

03.exceptional situations are indicated per SKU © SAP AG ICP320 8-19 .2002 01.Evaluation of Planning Result (1) AFS Stock/Requirements List AFS MRP Status T-Temporarily assigned I-Additional Info T – Temporarily assigned stock/requirements Details MRP element RqTy Order number Item Del. e. AFS MRP result screen / AFS MRP list The AFS MRP result screen and AFS MRP list display the result of the latest or last planning run taking into account the AFS specific data (grid values and categories).2002 A 0000011516 0001 0000011516 0001 36 36 BLK BLK 0000006798 0010 01.2002 EXPSS1 EXPSS1 EXPSS1 EXPSS1 BLK 10 St.options for displaying totals and subtotals .sorting and filter options can be defined .2002 C 0010 25.AFS MRP .02.g.list display options can be selected (colored blocks.02.02. The MRP statuses help to understand the stock/requirement situation. There are also specific AFS functions for analyzing the planning results.02.2002 C 0010 01.information fields can be added or hidden .02. etc.the layout can be changed for the actual session or saved permanently or user-dependent Exception Messages .03.2002 14.2002 EXPSS1 DOMSS1 EXPSS1 DOMSS1 DOMSS1 DOMSS1 0010692648 0001 001 38 RED 10 20 40 Sorting Total / Subtotals © SAP AG 2008 AFS provides various options to evaluate the planning results: On the one hand there are evaluation options developed specifically for AFS – such as AFS MRP list and AFS Stock/Requirements list.. MD04/MD05.02.2002 C 0010 25.) .2002 14.Date PB PB 0000006798 01 01 01 0000008801 0000008801 0010 18. available Category Category 14. On the other hand standard evaluations can be used – they have been partially enhanced by AFS specific data (grid values and categories).2002 A Search/Filter 0000011525 0001 0010692651 36 001 36 Own Layouts Mat. Requirement shortages are displayed on SKU level. Stock/Supply Sloc EM Size Color Qty WHT 10 20 5 5 14.03.02. Layout Options .

© SAP AG ICP320 8-20 .function Display BOM to call required components (both AFS and standard) per MRP element Technical Logfile By using the logfile J_3AMPRO an error analysis of the AFS MRP run can be run in the background.Required Components .

The Overview Tree collects all the materials the MRP list was displayed for in the actual session.AFS Filter Material Plant MRP type TM-COAT 0001 PD Trench-Coat TM-COAT TP-SHIRT TM-POLO T-Temporarily assigned I-Additional Info T – Temporarily assigned stock/requirements RqTy Order number Item Del.2002 C 0010 18. © SAP AG ICP320 8-21 .Date PB 01 01 0000008801 Filter for Grid Values and Categories T – Temporarily Size Color Reqmt. 0000011525 0001 0000011516 0001 36 36 BLK BLK BLK 10 EXP 5 EXP 0000006798 0000008801 0010 01. No new supply is created to meet demand. Requirement assignments to stock are NOT saved. Excess supply (eg. The scope of function of the AFS Stock/Requirements list corresponds to that of the AFS MRP list. Fixed procurement proposals cannot be changed by MRP anymore.02.Evaluation of Planning Results (2) Hide overview tree Traf Light Material AFS Stock/Requirements list . Fixed planned orders and fixed purchase requisitions are identified with a padlock symbol. Overview Tree & AFS Filter AFS Filter offers the option to filter according to grid values and categories.category Stock category 36 BLK St.03.AFS MRP .02.2002 A 0010692648 0001 001 38 10 DOM 20 20 assigned stock/requirements to to to to 38 BLK filtered result © SAP AG 2008 AFS Stock/Requirement list The AFS Stock/Requirement list is continuously updated – changes are displayed in the list directly. This helps to distinguish manually created procurement proposals from proposals generated by MRP.: requirements) is seen with "B" MRP Status. Stock/Supply Sloc EM Size Color Qty Cat.2002 C 0010 25.

© SAP AG ICP320 8-22 .Status Event Flow EVENT Sales Order ARun (normal mode) Delivery creation Delivery Change Post Goods Issue Reduce Quantity (Picking) MRP STATUS (as on requirement record) Stock/future receipts available A T F D Requirement Deleted MRP No stock/future receipts available yet R D B © SAP AG 2008 Status A Unrestricted-use stock – if no stock or future receipt is available. MRP was not run yet Status F Fixed stock – ready for delivery – allocation run was carried out.MRP list: requirements which could not be taken into account during latest MRP run Blocked Stock . MRP creates a procurement proposal which can then be assigned Status T Temporary assignment of requirements to stock Status B Blocked Stock .AFS MRP .Stock/Requirements list: no stock could be assigned for new requirements. Only unrestricted stock can create an assignment with an MRP status of "F“ Status R Reserved stock by allocation run – only partially confirmed requirements – allocation of future receipts Status D Assignment by delivery note – delivery in Sales already carried out.

Sales order (make to order) was rejected Status S Third-party order processing Status K Vendor consignment Status P Requirements outside of the planning horizon Status 3 Consumed planned independent requirements – called via menu Go to -> reduced planned requirements © SAP AG ICP320 8-23 . eg.Status I Statistical overview of latest planning run Status E Sales order stock – make-to-order production or purchase-to-order procurement Status N Stock with account assignment but no requirement.

© SAP AG ICP320 8-24 .Standard Stock/Requirements List for AFS Material (1) Standard Stock/Requirements List © SAP AG 2008 Standard Stock/Requirements List The Standard SRL can be used for AFS material. category value). Requirements and receipts are displayed for the selected time range (days. The period details show the exact MRP elements with the corresponding quantities. weeks. In addition there is the option to display the period totals for an overview in detail (summary icon). For AFS material additional the AFS Filter can be used. as well the conversion typ. All SKU level data are integrated (grid value. months).

Current Standard Stock/Requirements list The Standard MRP list can be used for AFS materials to a certain extent for displaying the planning result at material level.9 9. Collective Display of the Standard Stock/Requirements list Limited overview of stock/requirement situation of the AFS materials according to chosen selection criteria.2 6 9. It is not possible to use this function for analyzing exception messages created during the last AFS planning run – the total of displayed exception messages per exception group refers to the standard MRP run.222. © SAP AG ICP320 8-25 . For each planned AFS material the total of created exception messages per exception group is listed. Category and grid values can be displayed by choosing AFS SKU Detail – it is also possible to call the AFS Stock/Requirement list.2 999.9 999.9 999. Supply 1st Polo Shirt Women 5-Pocket T-Shirt 9.Standard Stock/Requirements List for AFS Material (2) Collective Display: Stock/Requirements List Selected stock/requirements lists Plant MRP Controller Light Material TP-SHIRT TP-PANTS TM-POLO AFS MRP List 0001 001 Plant Germany Scott Fisher 2nd 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 stock Bun Mtyp PT 3 202 0 2 65 10 PC PC PC PC FERT F FERT F HAWA F HAWA F Material descrip.9 999.09. The analysis can be carried out down to the grid value and category level.2 6 TM-POLO_2 T-Shirt round neck 6 © SAP AG 2008 Collective Display of the Standard MRP list The collective display can be used to analyze exception messages for an AFS material and to check their origin.

AFS MRP . AFS provides the display of negative stocks on the AFS MRP list as well as on the AFS stock/requirements list.2002 P 0000088034 0000088034 0000088036 0000088036 030. BLK 030.06. You do not have to activate them in each material master record.negative stocks © SAP AG 2008 Negative Stock balances can only result if they are allowed on the following levels: valuation area level storage location level material master view plant data/storage 2 .. BLK RED GRE Qty 10 90 10 10 NB .2002 P 0001 29.Negative Stocks AFS Stock/Requirements List Show overview tree Material TC-FABRIC TM-BUTTON TM-SHIRT Material Plant MRP type TC-FABRIC 0001 PD MType Lotsize Cotton Fabric ROH EX Unit PC T-Temporarily assigned I-Additional Info T – temporarily assigned stock/requirements overview tree RqTy Order number Item Del.. The requirement type NB indicates the negative stocks.2002 P 0001 29. parameter negative stocks allowed in plant needs to be flagged to indicate that negative stocks of the material are allowed at the plant Negative stock on valuation area and storage location level can be allowed in the following customizing entry: Materials Management – Inventory Management and Physical Inventory – Goods Issue/Transfer Postings – Allow Negative Stocks Negative stock levels are already allowed for special stocks if negative stocks have been activated in the valuation area and for the special stock in question in the plant. Stock/Supply Sloc EM Color SKU-Level NB FA FA FA 0000001522 0001002844 0001002842 0001002845 0000 0000 06. Date St. © SAP AG ICP320 8-26 . Procurement proposals are generated by MRP for the negative stock quantities.2002 P 0001 15.06.06.06.

ERP Standard requires you to enter a quantity for each BOM line item.level-horizon method 1 Any demand entered with a requirement date later than the SKU-level-horizon will be planned and displayed on material-level. © SAP AG ICP320 8-27 .AFS MRP . SKU-level-horizon method 1 may be entered globally for a plant in Customizing (Production – MRP – Plant Parameters – Define General AFS Specific Control Parameters) or for a material in the AFS MRP view. Also. AFS ATP uses the SKU level horizon to determine when to search for exact SKU matches and when to search at material level. The SKU-level-horizon indicates the number of workdays always counted from the current date. The material master settings are first priority. SKU. In AFS you can enter deviation or zero quantities at SKU level. The SKUs of stock outside the horizon can be disregarded for ATP or MRP.SKU-Level-Horizon Method 1 Stock SKU Horizon 1 RLT Incoming Stock 3 Incoming Stock 1 Incoming Stock 2 Incoming Stock 4 300 Pcs XL Coverage not possible 300 Pcs M Coverage not possible 400 Pcs L Coverage possible at material level 200 Pcs (no grid value) Coverage possible at material level Time 800 Pcs M within horizon outside horizon Requirement © SAP AG 2008 AFS MRP handles the assignment of requirements to stock at material and SKU level differently depending on whether they lie within the SKU level horizon. The end of the SKU horizon is displayed in the AFS MRP list in the column additional information. The line value is the quantity used in MRP when planning on material level past the SKU-level-horizon when using method 1. A requirement that is outside the SKU horizon cannot be assigned to stock that is within the SKU horizon.

MRP searches for available stock at SKU level and assigns it to the requirement.AFS MRP . requirements that are outside of the SKU horizon can be assigned to stock within the SKU horizon. If the system does not find further stock at SKU level. If the requested delivery date is within the SKU horizon. in which no SKU data has yet to be transferred. The SKU method 2 is only valid for MRP if the indicator Activate SLH Method 2 on AFS MRP view in material master is set. For the ATP check only method 2 can be used.SKU-Level-Horizon Method 2 Stock Incoming Stock 1 SKU Horizon 2 . stock will be confirmed by ATP at SKU level.: a requirement can be confirmed because of incoming stock in the form of a purchase order. MRP MRP assigns the requirements to stock in two assignment phases.MRP Incoming Stock 3 Incoming Stock 2 Incoming Stock 4 300 pcs XL Coverage not possible (different SKUs) 300 pcs M Coverage 1 same SKU 500 pcs (no grid value) Coverage 3 at material level 200 pcs M 800 pcs M Coverage 2 same SKU within horizon outside horizon Requirement Assignment Phase 1: at SKU Level © SAP AG 2008 Assignment Phase 2: at Material Level The SKU horizon method 2 is an enhancement of the SKU horizon method 1. eg. In contrast to Method 1. For SKU method 1 only the SKU horizon needs to be entered. ATP Requirements that have a requested delivery date that is not within the SKU horizon are confirmed by ATP on material level. It is recommended to enter the same number of workdays for the SKU horizon 2 in MRP as well as in ATP. it aggregates the SKU data in assignment phase two and assigns the requirement to the stock at material level. To activate method 2 for the ATP check the SKU horizon needs to be entered for each ATP check rule (customizing) and the indicator Activate SLH Method 2 on AFS MRP view in the material master needs to be set. © SAP AG ICP320 8-28 . Within the first assignment phase.

© SAP AG ICP320 8-29 .AFS MRP . regardless of whether or not the requirement can be confirmed for the requested delivery date. if possible. It will only check the other permitted categories if the result of this check is negative. the availability check will be executed either until the end of the RLT or the end of the ATP search horizon (if the latter is shorter than the RLT). This method plays a particularly important role if AFS materials are using a coverage strategy which allows the coverage of a certain requirement category with more than one stock category. The ATP/MRP check method can be controlled for each ATP checking rule in Customizing or in the AFS MRP 1 view. MRP : The AFS/MRP method used during MRP is defined in the material master. the stock will be assigned. If so. Category higher than requested delivery date “ “ The system always tries to cover the requirement with the stock category that comes first in the stock/requirements assignment sequence defined for the coverage strategy. The setting in the ATP checking rule has higher ranking than the setting in the material master. regardless of its allowed category. ATP: If the RLT for your material is active. Requested delivery date higher than Category “C” The system tries to cover the requirement for the requested delivery date. That means that the system checks whether or not the desired category is available within the entire replenishment lead time (RLT) or ATP search horizon .The system first checks whether there is stock (in any category) available for the requested delivery date. That means that the system checks all of the available categories for a certain date before it proceeds to the next date within the Replenishment Lead Time or ATP search horizon.AFS MRP Search Method Parameter Setting = “C“ Stock 100 pieces Category B Requirement 400 pieces Category A Stock 200 pieces Category A Stock 100 pieces Category C Stock 300 pieces Category A Date Parameter Setting = “ “ Stock 200 pieces Category B Requirement 400 pieces Category A © SAP AG 2008 Stock 100 pieces Category A Stock 100 pieces Category C Stock 300 pieces Category A Date The ATP/MRP Method controls whether the category or the customer's requested delivery date should have higher priority when covering a requirement. The next available (incoming) stock will be assigned to the requirement.

This includes independent requirements or sales orders across various BOM levels. The respective stock element is highlighted by blue.element: Green highlighting: No highlighting: © SAP AG ICP320 8-30 . Plant 0001 0001 0001 0001 Material Suit Jacket Fabric Suit Rtyp 01 SB SB 01 Requirement 0000000564 0000005840 0000005841 0000000564 Item 000100 000001 000001 000100 Exceptn. Message Stock type P P Stock 0000005840 0000005841 0010001708 0000005840 Item 000001 000001 000010 000001 Dimension 1 10 10 BLK 10 Dimension 2 BLK BLK 010 A P WHT © SAP AG 2008 The order report is an evaluation that provides an overview of the current status of requirements. element: exception situation(s) exist on the level(s) below the requirement cannot be fulfilled by stock in time or no stock element exists for the respective requirement element the requirement is fulfilled by stock at the highest level. The stock can be immediately withdrawn. The MRP controller can see if shortages exist for certain components or if deadlines cannot be met for specific components on a particular BOM level. no exception situations occurred there is no further level to drill down to for that requirement / stock element White highlighting of requ. stock elements have been created for the level below.AFS Analysis: Order Report/Pegged Requirements (1) AFS Stock/Requirements List Order Report Level 1 2 3 1 Status T T T T Plant 0001 0001 0001 0001 Plan. Different situations are displayed by highlighting of the respective requirement / stock elements: Red highlighting of stock element: Red highlighting of requ. so that any problems that may have arisen in the production or procurement of composite groups or components can easily be detected.

Display the display of the order report can be changed by user. © SAP AG ICP320 8-31 .2002 28.000 150. Via the menu path: Settings .02. MLABEL-1-DE MLABEL-1-DE Stock Cat.000 100. it is possible to re-trace which requirements are the source of which order proposal and which requirements (especially sales orders) will be affected if an order proposal is cancelled or quantities are changed. SKU data is taken into account within the pegged requirement report as well as within the order report.2002 Avail.09.08.2002 15.09.2002 Requirement Cat. Both reports may be applied within the AFS MRP result screen as well as the AFS application path.09. MLABEL-1-EU MLABEL-1-EU MLABEL-1-DE MLABEL-1-DE (continued from previous slide) © SAP AG 2008 With the evaluation. Date 15.2002 14. Date 15.2002 14.09. ‘pegged requirements’.AFS Analysis: Order Report/Pegged Requirements (2) Quantity 100.000 210.000 Unit PC PC M PC Requ.

Fixed external Order W 40 02 240 0 240 240 3000 0 300300Material Plant TM-FABRIC-01 0001 Fabric for Shirts .2002 40 WHT 01.. weekly and daily display Quantities – by clicking on the actual quantities for receipts or issues the details of the MRP elements are shown in a pop-up © SAP AG ICP320 8-32 .. GV1 GV2 Date 1 2 3 4 5 6 38 38 40 40 42 42 Qty F 000001004044 1 F 000001004044 1 F 000001004044 1 F 000001004044 1 F 000001004044 1 F 000001004044 1 BLK 01.10. It is also possible to carry out the evaluation for a product group.10... Requirmts.2002 40 WHT 01.2002 40 BLK 01.. The evaluation is based on the data material of the AFS Stock/Requirements list.Cotton Plant 0001 .order 000001004044/PP01 07 240 Unit of measure AFS Detail Data S Stock no..10.2002 Prod... eg.10.. Item Sch. Navigation on screen Receipts and Issues are summarized – by clicking on the highlighted lines you can see the details. are compared to requirement elements.2002 40 WHT 01.2002 Prod..10.TM-COAT Plant..Net Time axis Receipts Planned Produced inhouse Prod....AFS Analysis: Standard Evaluation/Planning Situation Evaluation of the Planning Situation Material.order Issues Planned Ind.10.. which Planned Independent Requirements and sales orders are causing the requirements Time axis – by clicking on the highlighted time periods you can switch between monthly..10.10.. Stock elements..: receipts – which planned orders and which production orders are scheduled issues. followed by confirmation in the availability check (ATP)..Germany PC Available qty ATP qty Cumulated ATP © SAP AG 2008 606060- 2400 60- 3600 60- The evaluation provides an overview of the available quantity of an AFS material used for requirements coverage within a certain period...order 000001004044/PP01 07 240 M 10 02 0 0 0 0 1201201200 0 01.2002 40 Material Plant TM-FABRIC-01 0001 Fabric for Shirts . such as sales orders....Germany Unit of measure M 01.2002 40 BLK 01.0001 Segments.Cotton Trench-Coat Plant Germany W 41 02 0 0 0 0 1801801800 0 Plant 0001 . such as planned orders..

dependent requirements or reservations will consume planned independent requirements that lie within the consumption interval after the requirements date.Req’s 40 pieces MLABEL-1-EU Independent Requirements Sales Orders Backward consumption interval Forward consumption interval © SAP AG 2008 The consumption mode (MRP 3 view) defines the direction on the time axis in which the system consumes requirements.Indep. The consumption priority parameter allows consumption in dependence of the categories. Backward Consumption: Sales Orders.Req’s 100 pieces MLABEL-1-EU Delivery Sales Order 1 40 pieces MLABEL-1-DE Sales Order 2 20 pieces MLABEL-1-FR Pl. The consumption of requirement and stock categories is defined in the coverage strategy. the consumption priority on AFS MRP view can be used. dependent requirements or reservations will consume planned independent requirements that lie within the consumption interval before the requirements date.Indep. Forward Consumption: Sales Orders.AFS MRP . There are the following options: Priority according to category (without consumption mode) Priority 1: category / 2: consumption mode Priority according to consumption mode (without categories) Priority 1: consumption mode / 2: category see F1 help for examples © SAP AG ICP320 8-33 . The consumption intervals (MRP 3 view) define the consumption period (in workdays) for forward and/or backward consumption. The consumption can take place either backward or forward or in a combination of both modes. AFS consumption priority In addition to the standard consumption modes.Consumption of Independent Requirements by Sales Orders Sales Order Entry Sales Order 1 40 pieces MLABEL-1-DE Sales Order 2 20 pieces MLABEL-1-FR Pl.

Material Requirements Planning: Unit Summary You should now be able to: Outline MRP procedures Outline the Material Master settings for MRP Execute MRP & outline planning options Evaluate the planning result using AFS MRP list & AFS Stock/Requirements list Evaluate the planning results using the SAP standard MRP & Stock/Requirements list Analyze the planning results © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 8-34 .

consumption period. The sales order will be processed until Goods Issue – the MRP status will show the current status of the order. To facilitate the checking we will only work with a size M.Exercises Unit: Topic: Material Requirements Planning MRP At the conclusion of this exercise. Data Material Plant Views MRP 3 Consumption mode: 1 (backward consumption only) Backward consumption period: 30 days Consumption priority: 1 (priority according to category) TP-SWEAT## 0001 AFS MRP © SAP AG ICP320 8-35 . Allocation Run and creating Delivery Planned independent requirements have been entered for the sweatshirt TP-SWEAT##. 1-1 Add the consumption mode. period and consumption priority to the material master record Enter planned independent requirements for an AFS material Run MRP and review the impact of the category set-up on MRP Consume planned independent requirements with a sales order Interpret MRP Status after Goods Receipt. They are consumed by incoming sales orders according to the definition of the coverage strategy. you will be able to: • • • • • Add a consumption mode. consumption priority and coverage strategy to your material master for TP-SWEAT##.

3 months in the future M BLK 200 pc Remember to set them active this time. Save your data.1-2 Enter planned independent requirements for your material TP-SWEAT##. 1-3 Run MRP for TP-SWEAT##. Data Material Plant Category Version Radio button set to Requirements date Size/Color Quantity TP-SWEAT## 0001 MLABEL-DOM 00 SKU level M. Data Plant AFS-MRP control parameters Create pur. Planning mode for planned orders) Material 0001 TP-SWEAT## 1 (Purchase requisitions) 1 (Reactivate planning dates) Scheduling 1 (Basic dates will be determined © SAP AG ICP320 8-36 . req.

Is the information the same? Run MRP again for TP-SWEAT##. Use the same AFS MRP control parameters you used in exercise 7-3. __________________________________________________________________ Data Order type Sales organization Distribution channel Division Customer Purchase order number Requested delivery date Material Plant Requested category Size/Color Quantity OR 0001 01 01 TPCUSTOMER ## 3 months from today TP-SWEAT## 0001 Position 0010 MLABEL-DOM M BLK 20 pc Position 0020 Material 0001 MLABEL-EXP M BLK 10 pc M WHT 20 pc TP-SWEAT## Plant Requested category Size/Color Quantity Size/Color Quantity 1-5 Look at the standard R/3 Stock/Requirement List (MD04) and then at the AFS Stock/Requirement list to compare the two. © SAP AG ICP320 8-37 . Take note of the system message “Document incomplete” because of the missing sales price maintenance. Was the consumption of the planned independent requirements by the sales order done correctly? 1-6 1-7 Optional: Use the summary functions in AFS Stock/Requirements list to display the total quantity as well as the subtotal per color.1-4 Enter a sales order for your material TP-SWEAT##.

1-10 Run MRP again for TP-SWEAT##.1-8 Optional: Define your own layout of the AFS Stock/Requirements list. Save the new layout as user-specific ZLAYOUT##. You can check the actual stock with the Stock Overview list. Is the stock correctly assigned to the requirements? © SAP AG ICP320 8-38 . Confirm warning messages about batch postings. To shorten the process use the goods receipt without reference . 1-9 Enter goods receipt for TP-SWEAT##. Use the same AFS MRP control parameters you used in exercise 7-3. Add the field customer to the list and activate the striped pattern display. Data Movement Type Plant Storage Location Size/Color 501 0001 0001 M BLK Category MLABEL-DOM Quantity 20 pc M BLK MLABEL-EXP 10 pc M WHT MLABEL-EXP 20 pc Size/Color Category Quantity Size/Color Category Quantity Save the goods receipt.

Run MRP again for TP-SWEAT## and check the results on the AFS Stock/Requirements list again.1-11 Run Allocation Run to fix the stock to your sales order. (MRP control parameters of exercise 7-3) Data Warehouse Number Storage Type Picking Area Confirmation 100 001 001 Pick and Transfer © SAP AG ICP320 8-39 . Mode Display Data Material Material Plant Sales1 Open to delivery SD document TP-SWEAT## 0001 0001 (FIFO) Normal Allocation list today / 4 months after today Sales Order number exercise 7-4 1-12 Create a Delivery for your sales order. Check the AFS Stock/Requirements list for results – especially the MRP status. ARun control parameters ARun Type. Save the delivery. Run MRP again for TP-SWEAT## and check the effects on the MRP status again. Confirm the Transfer Order and post the goods issue afterwards. (MRP control parameters of exercise 7-3) Data Shipping Point Selection Date Order 1-13 0001 4 months from today Sales Order number exercise 7-4 Optional: Create a Transfer Order for the delivery.

© SAP AG ICP320 8-40 .

-out date today Follow-up material TP-THREAD-NEW## Follow-up grid value BLK 2-2 Enter Sales Order for material TP-SWEAT##. Therefore a follow-up material TP-THREAD-NEW## needs to be defined for this component. Data Order Type Sales organization Distribution channel Division Customer Purchase order Number Requested delivery date 0001 0001 01 01 TPCUSTOMER DISC## today + 4 weeks © SAP AG ICP320 8-41 . 2-1 Define the discontinuation date and follow-up material for TP-THREAD##.Exercise Optional Unit: Topic: Material Requirements Planning Material Discontinuation At the conclusion of this exercise. TP-THREAD## cannot be delivered anymore. you will be able to: • • • Define discontinuation in the material master including the follow-up material Enter a sales order Run MRP and review the impact of the discontinuation of the component For production of the sweatshirt TP-SWEAT## the component TPTHREAD## is necessary. Data Plant 0001 AFS MRP View / Discontinuation Ctrl Eff. MRP will take care of the discontinuation of the component and create the requirements for the follow-up material.

Plant Category Size/Color Quantity 2-3 0001 MLABEL-DOM M BLK 10 pc Run MRP for material TP-SWEAT##. req. Was a requirement created for the component TP-THREAD##? Why not? What has happened with the requirements? Data Plant AFS-MRP control parameters Create pur. Planning mode Material 0001 TP-SWEAT## Flag 1 (Purchase requisitions) 1 (Reactivate planning dates) Scheduling 1 (Basic dates will be determined for planned orders) Also plan unchanged © SAP AG ICP320 8-42 .

Logistics → Production → MRP → AFS Planning → Single-Item Planning 1-4 Enter a sales order for your material TP-SWEAT##. consumption period. In the following PopUp select the requested category MLABEL-DOM. • 1-5 Look at the standard R/3 Stock/Requirement List (MD04) and then at the AFS Stock/Requirement ( /AFS/MD04)list to compare the two. the two lists will once again be identical. Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Order → Create • • • • Enter the general data Choose AFS Item overview. consumption priority and coverage strategy to your material master for TP-SWEAT##. The AFS Stock/Requirements list will follow those set-ups.Solution Unit: Topic: Material Requirements Planning MRP 1-1 Add the consumption mode. Redo same steps for second position. Choose <Enter>. Once MRP is run. The standard R/3 Stock/Requirements list will not take the dimensions and categories into consideration and will consume stock regardless of the category tables defined in AFS. Select line and choose <Matrix entry>. Logistics → Production → Production Planning → Demand Management → AFS Planned Independent Requirements → Maintain Flag ‘active’. If the system takes you to the Standard order availability control overview SKUs screen choose <Proposal>. Save your data. 1-3 Run MRP for TP-SWEAT##. Logistics → Production → MRP → Evaluations → Stock/reqmts list © SAP AG ICP320 8-43 . Logistics → Production → Master Data → Material Master → Material → Change → Immediately 1-2 Enter planned independent requirements for your material TP-SWEAT##. Enter material. Enter the respective quantity for first position.

requirement category MLABEL-EXP also consumes planned independent requirements of category MLABEL-DOM according to the settings in the coverage strategy in customizing. flag with optimum column width and striped pattern. To shorten the process use the goods receipt without reference. Was the consumption of the planned independent requirements by the sales order completed correctly? Logistics → Production → MRP → AFS Planning → Single-Item Planning Yes. Normally the goods receipt is done in relation to the production order or the purchase order. After this the function Subtotal is active – select the column color and select the function Subtotal to display the subtotals per color. Add the field customer to the list and activate the striped pattern display. Select column Quantity and use the function Total to display the total quantity. select the field Customer from the Column Set and add it to the selected fields. Enter a goods receipt for your sales order positions. Save the layout. Select the flag user-specific and define the layout name ZLAYOUT## and the layout description. Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management → Environment → Stock → Stock Overview © SAP AG ICP320 8-44 . 1-7 Optional: Use the summary functions in AFS Stock/Requirements list to display the total quantity as well as the subtotal per color. On the tab strip Display. Save the new layout as user-specific ZLAYOUT##. Requirement category MLABEL-DOM consumes planned independent requirements of category MLABEL-DOM. To shorten the process the goods receipt without reference is used. On the tab strip Columns. Select the function Select Layout and choose Change Layout. Use the same AFS MRP control parameters you used in exercise 7-3.Logistics → Production → MRP → AFS Analyses → AFS Stock/Reqs list 1-6 Run MRP again for TP-SWEAT##. 1-9 Enter goods receipt for TP-SWEAT##. Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management → Goods Movement → Goods Receipt → Other The Stock Overview list can be used to check the goods receipt posting. 1-8 Optional: Define your own layout of the AFS Stock/Requirements list.

Save the delivery. Is the stock correctly assigned to the requirements? Logistics → Production → MRP → AFS Planning → Single-Item Planning The sales order is now assigned to the batches just posted for the corresponding size/color combinations. Your sales order is now fixed and assigned to the stock. Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Shipping and Transportation → Outbound Delivery→ Create → Single Document → With reference to Sales Order • • Enter the Data <Enter><Save> Run MRP again for TP-SWEAT## and check the effects on the MRP status again. Remember to save the Allocation Run results. Logistics → Allocation Run → Online Processing Attention ! The Sales Order needs to be complete in order to be selected by the Allocation Run. Check the AFS Stock/Requirements list for results – especially the MRP status. © SAP AG ICP320 8-45 . The AFS stock/requirements list (/AFS/MD04)shows a new tab strip for the MRP status F – assignment fixed: open for delivery. Logistics → Production → MRP → AFS Planning → Single-Item Planning The AFS stock/requirements list shows a new tab strip for the MRP status D – Assignment fixed on delivery note – all sales orders with an existing delivery are listed in this MRP status. 1-11 Run Allocation Run to fix the stock to your sales order.1-10 Run MRP again for TP-SWEAT##. 1-12 Create a Delivery for your sales order. The columns stock type and stock number shows that the batches are assigned.

Post goods issue: Logistics → Sales and Distribution→ Shipping and Transportation → Outbound Delivery → Change → Single Document Button: Post goods issue Run MRP again for TP-SWEAT## and check the results on the AFS Stock/Requirements list again. Logistics → Sales and Distribution→ Shipping and Transportation → Outbound Delivery→ Change → Single Document Create Transfer Order: Logistics → Sales and Distribution→ Shipping and Transportation → Picking→ Create Transfer Order → Single Document Confirm Transfer Order: Logistics → Sales and Distribution→ Shipping and Transportation → Picking → Confirm Transfer Order → Single Document → In One Step The picking quantity is transferred to the delivery after the confirmation.1-13 Optional: Create a Transfer Order for the delivery. © SAP AG ICP320 8-46 . therefore the sales order is no longer visible in the AFS Stock/Requirements list. Confirm the Transfer Order and post the goods issue afterwards. Logistics → Production → MRP → AFS Planning → Single-Item Planning The goods issue for the sales order is completed.

Logistics → Production → MRP → AFS Planning → Single-Item Planning A planned order was created to supply the requirements of the sales order.Solution Optional Unit: Topic: Material Requirements Planning Material Discontinuation 2-1 Define the discontinuation date and follow-up material for TP-THREAD##. Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Order → Create Choose AFS Item overview. Display the Bill of material for the planned order. Enter the respective quantity. If you check the AFS Stock/Requirements list for the follow-up material TP-THREADNEW## the respective requirements and procurement proposals are automatically created for the follow-up material. In the following PopUp select the requested category MLABEL-DOM.Discontinuation Ctrl 2-2 Enter Sales Order for material TP-SWEAT##. © SAP AG ICP320 8-47 . If the system takes you to the Standard order availability control overview SKUs screen choose <Proposal>. Select line and choose <Matrix entry>. Logistics → Production → Master Data → Material Master → Material→ Change → Immediately AFS MRP View . The follow-up material for TP-THREAD is listed. Choose <Enter>. Enter material. 2-3 Run MRP for material TP-SWEAT##.

© SAP AG ICP320 8-48 .

Production: Course Content Preface Unit 1 Unit 2 Unit 3 Unit 4 Unit 5 Unit 6 Unit 7 Unit 8 Unit 9 Unit 10 Course Overview Master Data Procurement Inventory Management Invoice Verification Special Business Processes Product Forecasting Planning MRP Production Conclusion Appendices © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 9-1 .

Production Contents: Routing Planned Order and Production Order Missing Part Information System Confirmation of Production Orders Markers and Bundles Combined Orders Make-to-Order Order Progress Report External Process © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 9-2 .

you will be able to: Describe the routing selection process in AFS Describe the additional information contained in planned orders and production orders in AFS Perform and analyze ATP check on components from an AFS production order Access the missing part information system Assign component batches to header materials in production order Confirm production orders in AFS © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 9-3 .Production: Unit Objectives (1) After completing this course.

Production: Unit Objectives (2) After completing this course. ERP Use the order progress report Describe the external process from production order © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 9-4 . you will be able to: Describe how AFS bundle and marker data is used Create a combined order from production orders Describe the differences in the Make-to-Order process between AFS and Std.

This data is based on production forecasting and planning. © SAP AG ICP320 9-5 .Production: Course Overview Diagram AFS Master Data Material Grids Categories Material Master Customer Master Vendor Master Bill of Materials Pricing Value Added Services Seasons Sales and Distribution Sales MRP Procurement Allocation Run Delivery Billing Sales Information System Procurement Purchase Source Purchase Requisition Allocation Order Warehouse Management Production SOP MRP Markers Valuation/ Production Production Product Order Lots Costing Goods Receipt Routing Planned Order Invoice Verification AFS specific functionality ERP Standard functionality with AFS enhancements © SAP AG 2008 Data resulting from the routing and the BOM is used in your production procedure.

© SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 9-6 . that the company decides to use the remaining fabric from a different style that was dropped at the last minute. We want to check the availability of the fabric component after a partial delivery. Since this is a re-run. we need to adjust the planned order. already laid markers are on file and marker details for bundle information can be entered. Since the marker yields a slightly different number of garments. The jacket is selling so successfully.Production: Business Scenario (1) A production order for our jacket is created manually.

Production: Business Scenario (2) The jacket has to be produced in two categories. Since the two garments only differ in the embroidery on the inside and the private label. the pattern pieces are identical. In order to follow this sales order through production. The order quantities are not very high which results in low ply heights. The shop floor manager decides to spread and cut the two orders together. Global Fashion decides to take on a large sales order from a chain store. it needs to be entered as make-to-order. © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 9-7 .

you will be able to: Describe the routing selection process in AFS © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 9-8 .Routing: Topic Objectives After completing this course.

You can maintain a valid routing for all categories you wish to be produced.AFS Routing AFS routings can be category-dependent Routing A Group Counter 1 Category MLABELCutting Sewing Quality Inspection Routing B Group Counter 2 Category PLABELCutting Embroidery Sewing Quality Inspection © SAP AG 2008 Routings describe the sequence of operations required to produce a specific material. © SAP AG ICP320 9-9 . You can make different routings valid by including or excluding them for the particular categories you wish to be produced. Production resources/tools (PRT) can only be category dependent. Routings cannot be dimension dependent.

ERP Standard selection process: Quantity to be produced Validity date Production version Additional AFS criteria: Category © SAP AG ICP320 9-10 .AFS Routing .Selection Process 1 ERP Standard Routings 2 ERP Standard Selection 3 ERP Selection Complete 4 AFS Selection 5 Selection Complete © SAP AG 2008 AFS uses the standard method for selecting routing. then uses AFS criteria.

you will be able to: Describe the additional information contained in planned orders and production orders in AFS Perform and analyze ATP check on components from an AFS production order Access the missing part information system Assign component batches to header materials in production order © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 9-11 .Production: Topic Objectives (1) After completing this course.

you will be able to: Confirm production orders in AFS Describe how AFS bundle and marker data is used Create a combined order from production orders © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 9-12 .Production: Topic Objectives (2) After completing this course.

© SAP AG ICP320 9-13 .AFS Planned Order (1) AFS Planned Order Material: JACKET Order Quantity: 30 pieces Size Color BLK WHT Several Grid Values RED 6 10 10 10 8 10 12 Category Segment MLABEL One Category © SAP AG 2008 You can only add one category per planned order but several grid values.

use the Standard ERP menu path. © SAP AG ICP320 9-14 . To enter a planned order manually. Due to the SKU information.AFS Planned Order (2) Planned Order Production Order MRP Planned Order Production Order Planned Order Production Order © SAP AG 2008 You can create a planned order automatically in the planning run. collective conversion of planned orders into production orders does not allow for any changes at conversion time. Planned orders cannot be partially converted into production orders.

© SAP AG ICP320 9-15 .AFS Production Order (1) AFS Production Order Material: JACKET Order Quantity: 30 pieces Size Color BLK WHT Several Grid Values RED 6 10 10 10 8 10 12 Category Segment MLABEL One Category © SAP AG 2008 You can only add one category per production order but you can add several grid values. This information is taken from the bill of material (BOM) and the routing.

and copied into the production order.AFS Production Order (2) 1 AFS Routing 2 AFS BOM 3 AFS Production Order (Categories) (Grid Values and Categories) (Grid Values and 1 Category) © SAP AG 2008 For AFS materials. © SAP AG ICP320 9-16 . The BOM is selected depending on grid values and categories. the routing is selected depending on the category.

Date 01. Date 01.10.09.2006 MRP MRP Date Requirement 2.10. Date 01.2006 PRequ 10000011 100 m Fabric PrO 1000020 100 m Fabric Requ. AFS PP Logic Stock PRequ 10000005 100 m Fabric PrO 1000020 100 m Fabric Requ.09.2006 PrO 1000021 100 m Fabric Requ.2006 MRP MRP Date Requirement © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 9-17 . Standard Logic Stock PRequ 10000010 100 m Fabric PrO 1000021 100 m Fabric Requ.AFS Production Order . Date 01.ATP Logics 1.

for example planned independent requirements. Restricted-use stock Include Restricted-use Stock W/o subcontracting W/o Subcontracting Replenishment Lead Time Check without RLT Storage Location Check No Storage Loc. for example. checking rule and scope of check (Customizing). Note: In AFS you cannot include the storage location for the ATP check. All marked fields in the illus above are supported by AFS and work like the ERP Standard. stock Include Quality Inspection Stock Incl. procurements proposals. Inspection Missing Parts Process Checking Period: GR 02 Individual Requirements PP PP Checking Rule Receipts/Issues Include Purchase Orders Include Purchase Requisition Include Dependent Requirements Include Reservations Include Sales Requirements Include Deliveries Include Shipping Notification Include Dependent X Reservations Include Release Order Requirements X Include Planned Orders With Production Orders Receipts in the Past Include Receipts from Past and Future © SAP AG 2008 For the most parts. MRP search method and discontinuation of SKUs have to be entered in the Customizing. SKU level horizon.AFS Production Order . The ATP checks against planning. © SAP AG ICP320 9-18 . The ATP in AFS checks against available stock or planned stock. Settings that must be maintained for the ATP check of AFS components in a production order are: checking group.ATP Scope of Check Availability Check Checking Rule Stock Include safety stock Include Safety Stock Stock in transfer Stock in Transfer Incl. Special stock is no longer set active for the ATP check (Customizing) but can be maintained in the Standard scope of check which is taken into consideration by the ATP check. Quality insp. AFS includes the Standard scope of check in ATP. AFS specific settings like search horizon. Blocked stock Include Blocked Stock Incl.

.. R.10. This may serve as an overview across components’ availability..12.Explain ATP Explain ATP ATP Overview Material Plant TPP-SELF 0001 Requirements Date AFS Production Self-Delta WS 29.lead time SKU horizon Avail.. The single stock elements are displayed which are originating from the respective ATP result.. Dim1 Dim2 Quantity Stock Date Req.2006 Exce.2001 16.2001 29.2006 ATP Result Explain ATP ATP Overview Material TPP-SELF AFS Production Self-Delta WS Plant 0001 ReqDate 29.2006 000001000069 1 FA P 0000005238 08. Note: The Explain ATP function is also available in AFS planned orders and purchase orders. the total quantities from the sales orders referring to the header material can be displayed.11..10..2001 Replen. Date Quantity Grid value Stock Category ATP Horizon 31..lead Time 12.000 6 BLU ATP Result .Date FA 6 BLU 16. Stock number Sloc. Order number Item R.10. Stock Date Req. in production order a traffic light indicates availability of components: green: quantities are confirmed yellow: quantities are partially confirmed red: quantities are not confirmed In addition. © SAP AG ICP320 9-19 .2009 Size Level Horizon 22.11. Check 02 Checking rule PP ATP/MRP ChkMthd 12.11.10.11. In addition.11. The Explain ATP function can be applied for analyzing the ATP result calculated by the system.2006 Replen.11.AFS Production Order .2006 22. all data for horizons relevant to the AFS ATP check is provided..000 08.2006 Stock Category Explain ATP User Selection © SAP AG 2008 <Base values> <Base values> Stock/Req.List Reserve qty records On the ATP overview screen.2001 29.

250 M 14. © SAP AG ICP320 9-20 . of Item: 6 Material Plnt MRP group Order ReqDate ABRA-FABRIC 0001 001 ReqDate Astrid – Fabric for Testing Plant 0001 (Germany) MIKE MCGREGOR Material Reqmts q Shortage GrV SKU ReqQ SKUMis.02.2006 400 M 400 M TP-SELF 29 0001 001 Self Group 29 Plant 0001 (Germany) MIKE MCGREGOR The ERP Standard missing part information system is enhanced by SKU data.250 M 0M 0M 0M 0M 0M 0 0M 0 Pegged reqmt Private Label Group 21 Plant 0001 (Germany) MIKE MCGREGOR Material Reqmts q Shortage GrV SKU ReqQ SKUMis.AFS Production Order .Q SKU QtyW 100 PC 100 PC 100 PC 0 PC 0 PC 0 PC 0 PC 0 PC 0 0 PC 0 100 PC Pegged reqmt 1000107 TP-JACKET21 Material TP-SELF20 Plnt 0001 MRP group 001 Order Pegged reqmt ReqDate Self Group 28 Plant 0001 (Germany) MIKE MCGREGOR Material Reqmts q Shortage GrV SKU ReqQ SKUMis.07. Reserved component quantities and their missing parts can be displayed at SKU level.Missing Parts Info System Missing Parts Info System: Overview No.P Commit.Q SKU QtyW 42 M 1000061 ABRA-SHIRT-PP 11. Missing parts information is considered by the ATP check in the production order. The missing parts information system can be entered directly via production order or via menu path (TC: CO24).2006 42 M 14.P Commit.06.06.Q SKU QtyW 800 M 620 M 310 M 310 M 0M 0M 0M 0M 0M 0M 0M 0 0M 0 0M 0 1000099 TP-JACKET28 1000097 TP-JACKET28 Material Plnt MRP group © SAP AG 2008 28.2006 02.2006 Material Plnt MRP group Order TP-LABELP21 0001 001 ReqDate 03.P Commit.

ATP Usage MRP Today SKULH RLT Search horizon t © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 9-21 .Horizons in ATP Check Horizons in AFS ATP check AFS SKU-Level-Horizon Method Search Horizon Replenishment Lead Time ERP Std.AFS Production Order .

Requested delivery date higher than Category “C” The system tries to cover the requirement for the requested delivery date.ATP: If the RLT for your material is active. . The setting in the ATP checking rule has higher ranking than the setting in the material master. This method plays a particularly important role if AFS materials are using a coverage strategy which allows the coverage of a certain requirement category with more than one stock category.MRP : The AFS/MRP method used during MRP is defined in the material master. The ATP/MRP check method can be controlled for each ATP checking rule in Customizing or in the AFS MRP 1 view. . regardless of whether or not the requirement can be confirmed for the requested delivery date. © SAP AG ICP320 9-22 .AFS MRP . the availability check will be executed either until the end of the RLT or the end of the ATP search horizon (if the latter is shorter than the RLT). if possible. It will only check the other permitted categories if the result of this check is negative. regardless of its allowed category.AFS MRP Search Method Parameter Setting = “C“ Stock 100 pieces Category B Requirement 400 pieces Category A Stock 200 pieces Category A Stock 100 pieces Category C Stock 300 pieces Category A Date Parameter Setting = “ “ Stock 200 pieces Category B Requirement 400 pieces Category A © SAP AG 2008 Stock 100 pieces Category A Stock 100 pieces Category C Stock 300 pieces Category A Date The ATP/MRP Method controls whether the category or the customer's requested delivery date should have higher priority when covering a requirement.The system first checks whether there is stock (in any category) available for the requested delivery date. The next available (incoming) stock will be assigned to the requirement. Category higher than requested delivery date “ “ The system always tries to cover the requirement with the stock category that comes first in the stock/requirements assignment sequence defined for the coverage strategy. the stock will be assigned. If so. That means that the system checks all of the available categories for a certain date before it proceeds to the next date within the Replenishment Lead Time or ATP search horizon. That means that the system checks whether or not the desired category is available within the entire replenishment lead time (RLT) or ATP search horizon .

M Req. Total Rqmts Qty Batch 10 20 30 40 0000004594 0000004596 0000004593 0000004595 Sto.AFS Production Order ...000 1.100 Unreserved Qty 2.000.000 B. 0001 GrV 16 WHT Plant Quantity 2.000 1.Batch Assignment Maintain Batch Fixed Reservations Material TP-SELF99 Requirement 000001000028 Sto. One batch number may be fix reserved to several different production orders. batches can be selected using characteristics. © SAP AG ICP320 9-23 . M SKU Rqmts Qty 2.000 Stock Category Reserved qty © SAP AG 2008 Component batches can be assigned to a production order at SKU level.. 0001 0001 0001 0001 0.100 B.. If the components are AFS materials the batches are fix reserved in MRP....000. Note: Batch assignment in AFS production orders can only be done for AFS materials.batches Unrestricted 1.000 0.000..000 1. Category Total ord.000 GrV 16 BLK 16 BLK 16 WHT 16 WHT Sum sel. Batch assignments can be cancelled. If batch classification is used.100 0001 E.000. M M M M 0.qty Additional ord qty.

By clicking the Actual Data button.AFS Production Order . Col. customer specific profiles for configuration of the confirmation screen can be defined. BLK WHT WHT BLK Bundle yield to confi. © SAP AG ICP320 9-24 . 50 50 50 50 Bundle scrap to con.. PC Clear open reservations Confirm. Partial confirmation To confirm 300 0 0 Un..One-Screen-Confirmation Enter time ticket for production order Order Oper/activity Sub-operation Capacity cat. Previously confirmed quantities and scrap will also be displayed. Scrap quantities are displayed at SKU level. In addition tolerance checks at SKU level can be set up in the Customizing.. actual data can be taken over automatically. Standard one-screen-confirmation is supported in AFS. Work center CUTTING / 0001 Split AFS Cutting Work Center 1000082 0010 Material Sequence TP-AJACKET 0 AFS Casual Jacket Display Filter for AFS Data Sl. In Customizing. The one-screen-confirmation provides all data relevant for confirmation in one screen for easy maintenance by the user.. Type Quantities Yield Scrap Rework Reason Quantities (A <Base values> A.. 12 12 14 14 © SAP AG 2008 Entry 1 / 7 Un PC PC PC PC F Yield confirmed Confirmed scra 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 A..

St. They are greyed out.Manual Adjustment of Quantities Production Order Production Interlining Backflushing Confirmation: Goods movements Material Interlining Interlining Buttons Dim. This can be done for both ERP Standard and AFS materials. WHT BLK Quantity 200 220 200 550 Unit M M PC Plant 0001 0001 0001 Stor. Batches are selected automatically for AFS materials. © SAP AG ICP320 9-25 . however they need to be selected manually for ERP Standard materials as in ERP Standard. Some fields may not be changed for AFS materials. It is possible to add extra ERP Standard materials that may have been consumed for the production order.type 261 261 261 © SAP AG 2008 It is possible to change the quantities of backflushed materials in the goods movements screen when confirming operations. but no extra AFS materials may be added.AFS Production Order .cat. 0001 0001 0001 Batch 000000562 000000563 Mvt.

bundle data may be entered to ensure unique identification numbers. They comprise the marker ID. the occurrence of a size in a marker. © SAP AG ICP320 9-26 . and the occurrence of a marker on the cutting table.AFS Production Order .Bundles MARKER A MARKER B Plies of Fabric © SAP AG 2008 In the production order.

50 50 50 50 Size S S M L Color BLU BLU BLU RED © SAP AG 2008 A marker is the optimal placement of pattern pieces to achieve the best fabric utilization for the cutting process. © SAP AG ICP320 9-27 .AFS Production Order . the option needs to be set globally in Customizing or per material in the AFS MRP view of the material master record. Marker information is stored on external systems. AFS uses marker data to: Adjust quantities in a planned or production order Identify unique bundle numbers If markers or bundles will be used. Unique markers are defined by the name and repetition of the size and dimension values they contain. They can be plotted on paper or stored in a file that is used to drive a numerically controlled cutter. It can be accessed through a user exit.Markers and Bundles Marker Data Marker-ID A A A B Nr 1 1 1 1 Sec 1 2 1 1 Bundle qty.

The quantities must be adjusted to match the marker yield. © SAP AG ICP320 9-28 .Markers Quantity Adjustment AFS Planned Order BLU BLK Marker 1: External Marker Library 32 x 30 50 32 x 32 50 34 x 32 50 Waist Inseam 28 30 32 30 28 30 32 34 50 50 50 50 Marker 2: 30 x 30 50 28 x 32 50 Total: 230 pieces Total: 250 pieces © SAP AG 2008 If canned markers from a marker library are used.AFS Production Order . the resulting quantities may not necessarily coincide with the quantities in the planned order or production order.

This function is available for planned orders and production orders whether created by the planning run or manually entered. AFS applies this percentage to each SKU in a planned order or production order and calculates the scrap per SKU to fill the SKU scrap fields. 29.Scrap Quantities at SKU Level Maintain grid value quantities for production orders Material Order OST-JACKET01 %00000000001 1 AFS Casual Jacket-CO Plant 0001 Sloc Target quantity 232 Scrap 22 Total SKU qty 232 Sched. © SAP AG ICP320 9-29 . It is also possible to enter scrap as a quantity rather than a percentage.06. the percentage in the display is adjusted accordingly. AFS calculates the required quantity including the scrap as gross quantity at bundle level.Fin. This has to be done in the production order.AFS Production Order . As a result. The value is always rounded to an integer.2006 PC 10.48 % AFS additio AL‘s Siz 34 36 AL‘s col BLK BLK Net SKU qty 100 110 SKU scrap 10 12 Stock Category DCI BND ExpectVarianceRcpt 0 0 © SAP AG 2008 Scrap is entered as a percentage in the material master MRP1 view.

Order release can be performed manually or automatically. An availability check of components can be performed automatically. Goods receipt list You can release an entire order or several orders at the same time. Standard print programs (PPPR* or PSFC*) have been replaced by AFS specific reports (J_3A*). Goods issue slip. Operation control ticket. The standard print forms have been replaced by AFS specific forms. When the order is released. All shop floor papers include SKU and bundle information. Order release is the basis for many follow-up processes in the production order (printing of order documents. © SAP AG ICP320 9-30 . the system activates a corresponding status in the order. and so on). The following shop floor papers have been enhanced: Confirmation slip.AFS Production Order . material issues.Creation and Release Order Creation Production Order Availability Check Order Release Printing of Documents Material Withdrawal Completion Confirmation Goods Receipt Order Settlement Processing © SAP AG 2008 Production orders are managed using status. Standard layout set. Time ticket. Shop floor control papers provide SKU information for header materials as well as for their components. Pick list. Object overview.

Each individual production order still exists in the system but they are treated as one. production orders originating in different plants may be combined. © SAP AG ICP320 9-31 . A combined order number may be entered manually or can be assigned automatically.AFS Combined Orders Production Order 10023 Production Order 10024 Production Order 10025 Combined Order Number 38 10023 10024 10025 © SAP AG 2008 Production orders can be chosen to form a combined order using certain selection criteria. If special procurement key 70 (Withdrawal from alternative plant) is used.

this would most likely involve the cutting process in an attempt to optimize the cutting capacities.AFS Combined Orders in the Production Process Combined Order Number 38 10023 10024 Production Order 10023 Routing 1 Production Order 10024 Routing 2 Cutting Embroidery Sewing Sewing Quality Check © SAP AG 2008 Quality Check Reasons for combining production orders could be a shared material. header or component. © SAP AG ICP320 9-32 . In the apparel industry. and work process or merely a common work process.

that is. Once batches have been assigned to combined orders. © SAP AG ICP320 9-33 . ERP Standard batch search strategies may also be used.Batch Assignment Combined Order Number 38 10023 10024 Material 5520 BATCH 001 Material 5520 BATCH 002 Material 5520 BATCH 003 Combined Order Number 39 10026 10027 Selection by: Category Classification Storage location © SAP AG 2008 A combined order may be done: Without batch assignment With batch assignment The batches can be selected using different criteria. categories or classification and storage location.AFS Combined Orders . they are fixed assigned in MRP.

Functions Combined Order Number 38 10023 10024 10025 Release Goods Issue Confirmation © SAP AG 2008 Combined orders can be released as one goods issue can be posted for the materials combined all orders can be confirmed for the common work center in one step If more goods are issued than necessary for the combined production orders.AFS Combined Orders . © SAP AG ICP320 9-34 . the excess is distributed across the individual orders proportionally.

AFS Make-to-Order Process: Topic Objectives After completing this course. ERP Use the order progress report Describe the external process from production order © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 9-35 . you will be able to: Describe the differences in the Make-to-Order process between AFS and Std.

When using MTO. lot size procedures are not supported in AFS The MRP must be run for MTO sales orders to create planned orders. not by the strategy group As in standard. the MTO stock is listed with an individual status “E” (Sales Order Stock) and a separate segment per sales order item. one for Make-to-Order process with Controlling (JMT3 – schedule line category J6) and one without (JMT2 – schedule lien category J4). If you use Make-to-Order with CO you may control the value stock within the sales order. SKU quantities changed in the planned order or production order won’t be updated in the sales order. There are some differences to the ERP Standard Make-to-Order process: The MTO process is initiated by item category in the sales order. Make-to-Order without CO results in the costs incurred per sales order to be treated as in the Maketo-Stock process. Make-to-Order with CO results in the costs being assigned to a specific sales order (Valuation Class 7921 – Finished products / MTO). © SAP AG ICP320 9-36 . It only binds the sales order to a particular production order.AFS Make-to-Order Sales Order Order Type: OR Material: TP-Shirt Item: 0010 10 pieces L BLK 0020 10 pieces M BLK Item Category: JMT2 (w/o CO) JMT3 (with CO) MRP MRP Status “E” (Sales Order Stock) Planned Order 7732 10 pieces L BLK Planned Order 7733 10 pieces M BLK Production Order Production Order 1000381 1000382 10 pieces 10 pieces L BLK M BLK Sales Order Stock © SAP AG 2008 Supply of Components per Planned Order into Sales Order Stock AFS is delivered to customers with two pre-defined item categories. In the MRP result screen. it is possible to switch off the ARun in Customizing which is normally mandatory for delivery creation. the MRP list and the Stock/Requirement List.

06.0000 M 00.0000 252 © SAP AG 2008 SlsOrd 131/100 00.2006 29.07.0000 26. Base Unit Grid val Quantity Confirmed Base Sched.00.2006 29.00.2006 29.2006 PC 11.2006 PC PC PC PC PC PC 11.0000 0.00.06.00.00.0000 PC 0 110 - Mat - BLK WHT 4 BLK 4 WHT 00.2006 110 60 50 110 BLK WHT 4 BLK 4 WHT 60 50 110 00. master data and price data can be displayed in the order progress report. operation steps and order quantity are displayed on SKU level.00.07.00.0000 29.06.0000 0 0 0 0 00.2006 11. In addition to other information.00.2006 AFS supports the ERP Standard order progress report at SKU level and for every operation. you can define customer specific profiles for field display.0000 0 0 110 60 50 00. Ass.0000 00.06.0000 108 58 50 0 0 0 0 00.06.07.2006 29.07.0000 00.00.2006 0 252- - Operat Sewing 4 4 + Operat .2006 - PrdOrd - 0 108 29./req In-house p Plant stock Customer st.06. the order progress report is only supported for make-to-order scenarios sales orders.00. Deviation quantities resulting from the manufacturing process may be monitored in the report.Mat Final Inspection TP-Self 218/1 - OrdRes 00.07.start Actual start 0001 TPP-COAT Dimension Values 4 4 SlsOrd 131/100 1000105 0001 Operat Cutting 4 4 BLK WHT 4 BLK 4 WHT 11.0000 00.Order Progress Report Order Progress Report: Object Structure Order 131 Type OR Ordering Party CUSTOMER Plant Scheduled date Actual finish Actual start Expected Rec.2006 11.0000 00.0000 0 00.0000 00.You can view the production progress for a sales order and its related planned and production orders.00.00. In Customizing.00.00. Note: As on ERP Standard.2006 11. For the production order.00.07.AFS Make-to-Order .00.06. sc.2006 29.00 PC PC PC 00.2006 11.07.06. © SAP AG ICP320 9-37 .0000 00.00. The report can be selected for a range of sales orders.2006 11.07.06.2006 29.0000 0 110- 00.

However. This is converted into a purchase order including SKU data of the finished material. AFS does not support the manual creation of subcontract purchase orders assigned to a production order. the external process is supported as in the ERP Standard system.g. e. a purchase requisition is created for the respective service.External Process Our Plant Cutting Provision of Components Dyeing Subcontract Purchase Order Subcontracting Vendor Sewing Embroidery Goods Receipt Invoice Dyeing © SAP AG 2008 Example: You need to order a service. In the ERP system.AFS Production Order . Data can be changed in the purchase order. © SAP AG ICP320 9-38 . Data in the purchase requisition cannot be changed. Note: In the purchase requisition no SKU data is displayed. the material number is not displayed. In the AFS system. The vendor‘s invoice is entered with reference to the purchase order. from a vendor.: for dyeing.

Production: Unit Summary You should now be able to: Describe the routing selection process in AFS Describe the additional information contained in planned orders and production orders in AFS Perform and analyze ATP check on components from an AFS production order Access the missing part information system Assign component batches to header materials in production order Confirm production orders in AFS © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 9-39 .

ERP Use the order progress report Describe the external process from production order © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 9-40 .Production: Unit Summary You should now be able to: Describe how AFS bundle and marker data is used Create a combined order from production orders Describe the differences in the Make-to-Order process between AFS and Std.

and SEWING. and will then go through final inspection (INSPECT). Use the following data: Data Material Plant Usage Status 1-1-1 TP-JACKET## 0001 1 (Production) 4 (Released general) Go to the Operation overview screen and enter the work centers referring to the introduction of this exercise. machine and labor times for the operations CUTTING. 1-1-2 © SAP AG ICP320 9-41 . Enter values of your choice for setup. EMBROID.go through the same manufacturing operations.Exercise Unit: Topic: Production Routing At the conclusion of this exercise.and one for PLABEL-. enter a value for labor only. Assign the routings to the respective categories. PLABEL. one for category MLABEL. MLABELand PLABEL. you will be able to: • Create a routing with AFS categories Global Fashion’s casual jacket is produced in two categories.will have one additional operation when the retailer’s shop name is embroidered (EMBROID) on the inside of the yoke. 1-1 Create two routings for your material TP-JACKET##. Both will be cut and sewn (SEWING). This is done after cutting (CUTTING). For INSPECT.

© SAP AG ICP320 9-42 .

We already received a partial delivery of black fabric. you will be able to: • • • Create a production order for an AFS material Perform ATP checks for AFS and non-AFS components in a production order and understand the ‘Explain ATP’ screen Confirm a production order and also do a goods receipt for a production order Use the Missing Parts Lists for AFS materials Several production orders for TP-JACKET## are created manually. The fabric is needed in two colors. Create the production orders manually. We want to check the availability of the fabric component TP-SELF##. Data Material Production plant Order type For production order 1: Finish date Dimension Stock category 2 months from today 14 WHT 50 pieces MLABEL-1-EU Make a note of the first production order number. Finally. This should be reflected in the ATPcheck. but do not release it. Three white garments came back as second quality. we need to consider that when booking them in. ____________________________________________________________ TP-JACKET## 0001 PP01 (Standard production order) © SAP AG ICP320 9-43 . In the Missing Parts List we want to check which production orders will not have all components delivered on time. We want to look at the impact that changes have on the ATP check. confirm on dimension level. we want to release the production order.Exercise Unit: Topic: Production Production Order At the conclusion of this exercise. 2-1 In order to show competing requirements for our fabric TP-SELF## we need to enter three production orders. black and white. and perform a goods receipt for the finished goods.

2-1-2 If you look at the quantities for the components. but do not release it. The competing requirements will be aggregated into one line. Carry out the ATP check for the component TP-SELF##. ____________________________________________________________ For production order 3: Finish date Dimension Stock category 3 months from today 14 WHT and 14 BLK 100 pieces each MLABEL-1-EU Do not release or save your order. Choose the <Explain ATP> button to get to the next screen. Select the <User Selection> button and remove the flags ‘Grid value’ and ‘Requirement Date’. These production orders generate competing requirements for this component. ____________________________________________________________ © SAP AG ICP320 9-44 . You can check other information such as the ‘Scope of check’ or the ‘Stock overview’ for that material.For production order 2: Finish date Dimension Stock category 2 months from today 16 WHT and 16 BLK 50 pieces each PLABEL-1Make a note of your second production order number. ____________________________________________________________ 2-1-1 Use the <Components> button to get to the component overview screen. yet. The <Expand> button at the bottom of this screen will turn the display of the consecutive numbers for the production order into their actual names. Make a note of its number. why do we need 396m of self and only 198m of lining? ____________________________________________________________ 2-1-3 Save your third production order.

Planning mode Scheduling TP-JACKET## 0001 3 (Planned orders) 1 (Reactivate planning dates) 1 (Basic dates will be determined for planned orders) Flag 'Also plan unchanged components'. Run the ATP check for the component TP-SELF##. Confirm one operation in your third production order by SKU. Your traffic light should now be green. Data Material Plant Create pur. 2-1-10 In the AFS Stock/Requirements List for TP-JACKET##. 2-1-5 2-1-6 In the AFS MRP result screen for component TP-SELF##. The rest should be first quality (MLABEL-1-EU) as requested in the production order. Use the confirmation by time ticket to do so.2-1-4 Run MRP for your material TP-JACKET##. 2-1-12 Call up the Missing Parts List Data Plant Order Layout 0001 Your range of order numbers /TP-PRO © SAP AG ICP320 9-45 . you will be able to see the “C” status for batches for the goods received. Save the production order. Req. Perform a goods receipt for your third order of your finished product TPJACKET## using the ‘MIGO’ screen. Don’t forget to flag the ‘ok’ box before posting. Repeat the ATP check for your component TP-SELF##. you should see the planned order created to fulfill the fabric requirement of the production order. Data Order Your production order number 2-1-7 2-1-8 2-1-9 Book three white garments in as second quality (category MLABEL-2-EU). Call your third production order up in Change mode. Why? How can you check this? ____________________________________________________________ Release your production order and save. 2-1-11 Call your second production order up in Change mode.

© SAP AG ICP320 9-46 .

3-1 Enter a sales order using the following data. provided by the fabric supplier. some slight differences in hue may occur. fabric rolls need to be dyed in different vats. TP-SHIRT##. we need to fixassign them to our production orders to ensure they are not issued by another production order. which can be ordered in several colors. Once the fabric rolls are selected.Exercise Unit: Topic: Production Batch Assignment in Production Order At the conclusion of this exercise. If quantities are high. you will be able to: • • Select particular batches for a production order Fix-assign batches to a production order Global Fashion also manufactures a shirt. Note the sales order number. TP-COTTON## is a cotton material which shows shading in some difficult colors. indicate the shading. Even though the general color is the same. Our customer will accept the order under the condition that only fabric rolls from one dye lot number will be used. ________________________________________________________________ Data Order type Sales organization Distribution channel Division Customer Purchase order number Requested delivery date Material Plant Requested category OR 0001 01 01 TPCUSTOMER ## Two months from today TP-SHIRT## 0001 MLABEL-1-GB © SAP AG ICP320 9-47 . The fabric. They are indicated by the different dye lot numbers. Different dye lot numbers.

Data Storage location Class 0001 FABRIC Save the production order and make a note of its number. ____________________________________________________________ 3-1-4 Check the reserved batches in the Stock Overview. Check the classification and choose the correct rolls or batches. Assign batches to the component TP-COTTON##.Size S RED BLU 3-1-1 3-1-2 3-1-3 50 50 100 Size M 50 50 100 Size L 50 50 100 Size XL 50 50 100 Total 200 200 400 Run MRP for your material. We also want to make sure that all selected rolls are from the same dye lot. we want to make sure that we only select fabric of a width of 148cm. As we want to spread the red and blue fabric together on one table. From the MRP display screen convert your planned order into a production order. Data Material Plant Display version TP-COTTON## 0001 99 © SAP AG ICP320 9-48 . You can use <Select Classification> to select rolls with the correct width.

All the other components are available on stock. Data Bundle 1 (Material produced with bundles) 4-1-1 Create a sales order using the following data. Sales have signaled that black is selling better than white and planning has enough yardage left of TPSELF## to make another 330 garments. we have already laid markers on file and can enter the marker details. you will be able to: • • • Create a planned order and maintain bundles Enter marker details and adjust the planned order to the quantities from the markers Confirm cutting operation on production lot level The jacket TP-JACKET## is selling so successfully that Global Fashion decided to use up the outer fabric we have left from another style that was dropped from the line at the last minute. The excess quantities are then available for another sales order. Note the sales order number. ____________________________________________________________ Data Order type Sales organization Distribution channel Division Customer Purchase order number Requested delivery date OR 0001 01 01 TPCUSTOMER ## One month from today © SAP AG ICP320 9-49 .Exercise Unit: Topic: Production Markers and Production Lots At the conclusion of this exercise. We will compare the quantities and if possible adjust the number of pieces in the planned order. The markers do not yield the exact quantity from the sales order. Since this is a re-run. 4-1 Change the AFS MRP view of your material master TP-JACKET##.

Take note of the system message "TP-LABELP## not taken over to order". Save your planned order. Note the sales order number. Adjust the quantities. Use the same AFS MRP control parameters used in the last exercise.Material Plant Requested category Size 6 WHT BLK 30 40 70 4-1-2 30 50 80 TP-JACKET## 0001 MLABEL-1-DE Size 8 Size 10 30 60 90 Size 12 30 40 70 Total 120 190 310 you Save your sales order. Size 6 30 40 Size 6 -Size 8 30 40 Size 8 20 Size 10 30 40 Size 10 20 Size 12 30 40 Size 12 -- Optional: Global Fashion still has black fabric left and we can accept another order for category MLABEL-1-FR. Note the production order number. Run MRP for your material. Then choose <Refresh> on the AFS MRP result screen. Ignore the message. ____________________________________________________________ 4-1-7 4-1-8 Confirm the cutting operation on bundle level via time ticket for your production order and save. Marker: 01 Color WHT BLK Marker: 02 Color BLK 4-1-3 4-1-4 4-1-5 Compare the quantities. Edit the planned order from MRP choosing the <change element> button. What happened to the excess quantities? _____________________________________________________________ 4-1-6 Convert your planned order into a production order and release it. In this example you may leave the ‘Nr’ and ‘Sec’ fields blank. ___________________________________________________________ © SAP AG ICP320 9-50 . Enter the marker data.

Why can’t this one be released? ____________________________________________________________ 4-1-11 Optional: How must you enter the marker data? Compare and adjust the marker quantities. Try to release and save the production order again. Note the production order number. Try to release the production order. ____________________________________________________________ © SAP AG ICP320 9-51 .Data Use the data from exercise 8-3-1 but replace: Customer Requested category Size 6 BLU 4-1-9 30 CUSTOMER MLABEL-1-FR Size 8 60 Size 10 50 Size 12 30 Total 170 Optional: Re-run MRP for your material and check the result. What happened to the excess quantities from before? ____________________________________________________________ 4-1-10 Optional: Convert the planned order into a production order from MRP.

© SAP AG ICP320 9-52 .

Data Storage location Movement type 5-1-6 0001 261 Select only the line for material TP-LINING##. ____________________________________________________________ 5-1-4 5-1-5 Release the combined order. Make a note of your combined order number. Since the two garments only differ in the embroidery on the inside and the private label. we want to change it back in order to facilitate the handling of the production orders. Do a goods issue for TP-LINING## for the combined order. Save. do a goods issue and confirm the common operation. ___________________________________________________________ In order to let the system propose the relevant batches during goods issue. Use ‘Refresh’ to see the status change. the pattern pieces are identical. release them as one.Exercise Unit: Topic: Production Combined Orders At the conclusion of this exercise. 5-1 As bundle entry is mandatory if selected in the material master. you will be able to: • Combine production orders. we need to run MRP for material TP-LINING##. Confirm the cutting operation for the combined order. Which parameter do we need to re-set in the material master and in which view? ______________________________________________________________________ 5-1-1 5-1-2 5-1-3 Use your first and second production order from exercise 8-2. Combine the two production orders without assigning batches. © SAP AG ICP320 9-53 . The shop floor manager decides to spread and cut the two orders together. Select by material or production order number interval and use TP-LINING## to combine the orders with internal numbering. Our jacket TP-JACKET## must be produced in two categories. The order quantities are not very high which results in low ply heights.

© SAP AG ICP320 9-54 .

you will be able to: • • • • • Enter a sales order for a make-to-order material. ____________________________________________________________________ Data Order type Sales organization Distribution channel Division Customer Purchase order number Requested delivery date Material Plant Requested category Item category Size S BLU 6 Size M 15 OR 0001 01 01 CUSTOMER ## One month from today TP-SHIRT## 0001 PLABEL-1JMT2 Size L 20 Size XL 9 Total 50 © SAP AG ICP320 9-55 . Note the sales order number. 6-1 Enter a sales order using the following data. Use the Order Progress Report to see the progress of the production order through the manufacturing process. we decide not to create another category. They have asked us to apply a crest to the front breast pocket. Change the Item category to JMT2. but enter a sales order and treat it as make-to-order.Exercise Unit: Topic: Production Make to Order At the conclusion of this exercise. Check the customer number and name in the Stock/Requirements List A customer would like to buy TP-SHIRT## as a uniform for a company event. Name the specifics for make-to-order in MRP. Check the assignment of the planned and production orders to the sales order. As this is a one-off.

___________________________________________________________ 6-1-7 Optional: Place your cursor on the production order and call it up in Change mode. 6-1-8 6-1-9 Place your cursor on the production order number and release the production order. © SAP AG ICP320 9-56 . Optional: Choose the BOM explosion icon. Place your cursor on the planned order number and convert the planned order into a production order. Select the correct purchase requisition and check the account assignment. Return to the Order Progress Report screen. Expand the SKU information for the first operation CUTTING. Double click on TP-INTERLINING##. Check the account assignment for the production order. 6-1-10 In a separate session confirm your first operation of the production order. It should show your sales order number. Data Order type PP01 Make a note of the production order number. What is the difference between the two components? ___________________________________________________________ 6-1-4 Call up the Order Progress Report and check the progress of your production order Data Plant Sales order Overall profile 0001 Your sales order number ZTP000000001 6-1-5 6-1-6 Expand the quantities in the sales order.6-1-1 Run MRP for your material. opening period) 6-1-2 6-1-3 From the MRP display screen view the planned order and check the account assignment. The <Confirmed quantity> column shows 0 quantities. Planning mode Scheduling TP-SHIRT## 0001 2 (Purchase requisitions in 1 (Reactivate planning dates) 1 (Basic dates will be determined for planned orders) Flag 'Also plan unchanged components'. Data Material Plant Create pur. Req. Return to the component overview screen and do the same for TP-BUTTON##.

In the <Confirmed quantity> column you should now see your confirmed quantities. 6-1-12 Post a goods receipt for your production order using the ‘MIGO’ screen. In the <Confirmed quantity> column you will now see the quantities that you have just booked into stock. 6-1-14 Optional: In the AFS Stock/Requirements List for TP-SHIRT## choose the <Layout(1)> drop down list to see the customer number and name in the <Sales Order Stock> view © SAP AG ICP320 9-57 . refresh your display and expand the SKU information for your first operation CUTTING. Data Storage location 0001 6-1-13 Go back to your Order Progress Report screen and once again refresh your display.6-1-11 Once again.

© SAP AG ICP320 9-58 .

setup. one per category. You need to create two routings. machine and labor. The categories are maintained in the header information. SEWING and INSPECT.Solution Unit: Topic: Production Routing 1-1 Create a routing for your material TP-JACKET##. CUTTING. Enter values of your choice for the following operations. 1-1-2 © SAP AG ICP320 9-59 . From the Header Details screen choose <Category> to include the respective category for the routing. Logistics → Production → Master data → Routings → Routings → Standard Routings → Create 1-1-1 In the Operation overview screen enter the work centers. EMBROID.

© SAP AG ICP320 9-60 .

They are filled in by default. According to the zero quantities set-up in the BOM we do not need any lining for the black jackets. as the scope of check also considers planned orders. From the ATP result screen. Note number. 2-1-7 2-1-8 Choose <Release Order>. © SAP AG ICP320 9-61 . Logistics → Production → MRP → AFS Planning → Single-Item Planning Check the AFS Stock/Requirements List for TP-SELF##. but we include planned orders. Run MRP for your material. Confirm one operation in your production order by dimension. Save. Logistics → Production → Production Control→ Confirmation → Enter → For Operation → Time ticket Enter your production order number and 0010 for your cutting operation. 2-1-6 Repeat the ATP check in your production order Logistics → Production → Production Control→ Order → Change When you carry out the ATP check again. You will see that we do the ATP check without Replenishment Lead Time.Solution Unit: Topic: Production Production Order 2-1 Create a production order manually. At the bottom of the screen you can see the quantities to confirm. you can choose <Explain ATP> and then <Scope of Check>. Logistics → Production→ MRP → AFS Analyses → AFS Stock/Requirements List You can also use the BOM explosion button to get to the components. your traffic light should now be green. Logistics → Production → Production Control→ Order → Create→ With material 2-1-1 2-1-2 2-1-3 2-1-4 2-1-5 When you carry out the ATP check your traffic light should be yellow because the component’s quantity is partially confirmed. then double click on TP-SELF##.

Logistics → Production → Production Control→ Order → Change 2-1-12 Call up the Missing Parts List Logistics → Production → Production Control→ Information System → Missing Parts Info System © SAP AG ICP320 9-62 . 2-1-11 Call your production order up in change mode and perform an ATP check for the component TP-SELF##. Save. Place your cursor on the line with the 14 WHT grid value. Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management → Goods movement → Goods receipt → GR for Order (MIGO) Enter the order number at the top of the screen. Logistics → Production→ MRP → AFS Analyses → AFS MRP Cockpit MRP Evaluation → AFS MRP . 2-1-10 Check the goods receipt for TP-JACKET## in the AFS Stock/Requirements List. Choose <Distribute qty>.2-1-9 Post a goods receipt for your production order. <Enter>.Stock/Requirements List <Execute>. Use the <F4> button to change your quality. On the Distribute Qty screen enter your 97 pieces of first quality. Flag <OK>. enter storage location 0001 and <Post>. and 3 pieces of second. <Adopt>.

Logistics → Production → MRP→ AFS Planning → Single-Item Planning Remember to flag 'Also plan unchanged components'. You can check the batch classification with <Edit → Display classification> <Select Classification> for class FABRIC. Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Order → Create (Sales orders for AFS materials are created in the standard path) 3-1-1 Run MRP for TP-SHIRT##. Save the production order. 3-1-3 Assign batches to the component TP-COTTON##. 3-1-4 Check the reserved batches in the Stock Overview.Solution Unit: Topic: Production Batch Assignment in Production Order 3-1 Enter a sales order for TP-SHIRT##. Choose <Batch assignment>. Enter the storage location 0001 for TP-COTTON##. Choose the <Component Overview> button to get to the list of components. -> Prod. Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management → Environment → Stock → Stock overview © SAP AG ICP320 9-63 . 3-1-2 Convert your planned order to a production order. enter the value you want to use as search criteria and choose <Find in initial class> Select the desired batches and requirements and choose <Assign> The batch assignment is saved when you go back to the Component Overview screen.Ord> Use the <Change element> button to edit your production order. <Edit → Convert → PldOrd.

© SAP AG ICP320 9-64 .

4-1-1 Enter a sales order for TP-JACKET##. Ignore the message. 4-1-2 Run MRP for TP-JACKET## Logistics → Production → MRP → AFS Planning → Single-Item Planning From MRP use the <change element> button to edit the planned order. Refresh the MRP display. Choose <Enter>. Enter material. to adjust the quantities in the planned order to those from the markers.Solution Unit: Topic: Production Markers and Production Lots 4-1 Change your material master for TP-JACKET## in the AFS MRP view. Save. Note that the traffic light next to the ‘Marker’ has changed from red to green.Ord>. place your cursor on the planned order number. The plant is filled in. Logistics → Production → Master data → Material master → Material → Change → Immediately Save. On the Planned order entry screen choose the <SKU data> button and on the next screen the <Markers> button. Choose <Category> and define the requested category MLABEL-1-DE. In the production order screen choose <Release> and <Save>. Alternatively. 4-1-6 Convert your planned order into a production order and release it. Choose the <Adjust quantities> button. Confirm with <Yes>. and set “Bundle” to “1 material produced with bundles”. Logistics → Sales and Distribution →Sales → Order → Create Choose AFS Item overview. Choose <Matrix entry>. The excess quantities are free available stock. If the system takes you to the Standard order availability control overview SKUs screen choose <Proposal>. Choose the <Copy> button and save the planned order. Enter the respective quantities per SKU. It is now fixed. -> Prod. 4-1-5 © SAP AG ICP320 9-65 . Enter the marker data. 4-1-3 4-1-4 Choose the <Compare quantities> button. Choose <Edit → Convert → PldOrd. You should see the excess quantities marked in red. The lock mark indicates a manually changed order.

Logistics → Sales and Distribution →Sales → Order → Create 4-1-9 Optional: Re-run MRP Logistics → Production → MRP → AFS Planning → Single-Item Planning The excess quantities were consumed by the new sales order. making consumption possible. Even though the two requirement categories are different. because the marker/bundle data has not yet been maintained. confirm the cutting operation of your production order at bundle level. <Save>. The production order cannot be released. 4-1-10 Optional: Convert your planned order to a production order. Logistics→ Production → Production Control→ Confirmation → Enter → For operation → Time ticket Enter your production order number and 0010 for your cutting operation. In the production order screen choose <Release> and <Save>. They are filled in by default. From the next screen choose the <Bundles> button and enter the marker data. At the bottom of the screen you can now see the bundle quantities to confirm. -> Prod. Alternatively. 4-1-8 Optional: Enter another sales order. Choose <Edit → Convert → PldOrd. place your cursor on the planned order number. Marker ID 01 01 01 01 02 02 Nr Sec Bundle Qty 30 30 30 30 20 20 Size 6 8 10 12 8 10 Color BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK © SAP AG ICP320 9-66 . 4-1-11 Optional: From the production order screen choose the <SKU Data> button.4-1-7 Using time ticket. they are satisfied by the same stock category.Ord>.

Logistics → Production → Master data → Material master → Material → Change→ Immediately Change the “Bundle” parameter in the AFS MRP view back to “blank”.Solution Unit: Topic: Production Combined Orders 5-1 Change your material master for TP-JACKET##. On the next screen select the component. Save. Logistics → Production → Production Control→ Order → AFS Combined orders → Additional Functions It is enough to select one line of the combined order. NETCH. for example TP-LINING##. Choose the <Release> button. for example. Logistics → Production → MRP → AFS Planning → Single-Item Planning Or use Logistics → Production → MRP → Planning → Single-Item. Run MRP for TP-LINING##.1) 5-1-3 Combine two production orders. select the orders and choose <Combine int. Choose <Execute>. that you would like to combine. Logistics → Production → Production Control→ Order → AFS Combined orders → Without Batch Assignment Select the production orders to be combined using your selection criteria. header material or production order number interval.1. © SAP AG ICP320 9-67 . 3. 5-1-4 Release the combined order and confirm the cutting operation of the combined order. and choose <Combine>. Multi-Level (Input parameter: TP-LINING##. 5-1-1 5-1-2 Use your first and second production order from exercise 8-2. Numb>.1. On the Combined orders maintenance screen. 0001.

Select only your material for TP-LINING## and choose <Enter>. 5-1-6 Confirm the cutting operation for the combined order. Logistics → Production → Production Control→ Order → AFS Combined orders → Additional Functions It is enough to select one line of the combined order.5-1-5 Do a goods issue for TP-LINING## for the combined order. Choose the <Confirm operation> button. Choose the <Goods issue> button. Logistics → Production → Production Control→ Order → AFS Combined orders → Additional Functions It is enough to select one line of the combined order. then choose <Continue>. Search the respective batch number for TP-LINING## using <F4> on the batch field. Choose batch and save. Do a refresh to see the result of your actions in the status field. On the next screen choose the operation to confirm. © SAP AG ICP320 9-68 . Search for “Batches for Plant Material”.

order” <Refresh> © SAP AG ICP320 9-69 . Convert the planned order to a production order from the Order Progress Report display screen. Optional: The account assignment information in a purchase requisition is under: <Account assignment> at the schedule line Because TP-BUTTON## is planned as a collective requirement you should not see the account assignment in the stock/requirements list of TP-BUTTON## (> material master: MRP4 view). Logistics → Production → Production Control→ Information System → Order Progress Report 6-1-5 6-1-6 Use the <Expand> button. 6-1-4 Execute the Order Progress Report. <select> the planned order Functions → “Convert planned order into prod. Look for “E” Sales Order stock. Logistics → Production → MRP→ AFS Planning → Single-Item Planning Remember to flag 'Also plan unchanged components'. 6-1-1 Run MRP for TP-SHIRT##.Solution Unit: Topic: Production Make-to-Order 6-1 Enter a sales order for TP-SHIRT##. 6-1-2 6-1-3 Use the Display BOM icon. Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Order → Create (Sales orders for AFS materials are created in the standard path) Enter Item category by clicking twice on the material.

6-1-13 Return to the Order Progress Report screen and <Refresh>. flag OK and choose <Post>. Use the <Expand> button. 6-1-14 Optional: Display the AFS Stock/Requirements List for TP-SHIRT##. Logistics → Production → Production Control→ Confirmation → Enter → For Operation → Time ticket 6-1-10 Confirm the CUTTING operation 0010: 6-1-11 Return to the Order Progress Report screen and <Refresh>.6-1-7 Optional: The account assignment information in a production order is under: <Assignment> 6-1-8 6-1-9 Release the production order. Use the <Release order> button. Logistics → Production→ MRP → AFS Analyses → AFS Stock/Requirements List choose the <Layout(1)> drop down list select <display/hide customer columns> © SAP AG ICP320 9-70 . 6-1-12 Post a goods receipt for your production order. Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management → Goods movement → Goods receipt → GR for Order (MIGO) Enter the production order number On each item enter the storage location 0001.

Conclusion: Course Content Preface Unit 1 Unit 2 Unit 3 Unit 4 Unit 5 Unit 6 Unit 7 Unit 8 Unit 9 Unit 10 Course Overview Master Data Procurement Inventory Management Invoice Verification Special Business Processes Product Forecasting Planning MRP Production Conclusion Appendices © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 10-1 .

Conclusion AFS Master Data Material Grids Categories Material Master Customer Master Vendor Master Bill of Materials Pricing Value Added Services Seasons Sales and Distribution Sales MRP Procurement Allocation Run Delivery Billing Sales Information System Procurement Purchase Source Purchase Requisition Allocation Order Warehouse Management Production SOP MRP Markers Valuation/ Production Production Product Order Lots Costing Goods Receipt Routing Planned Order Invoice Verification AFS specific functionality ERP Standard functionality with AFS enhancements © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 10-2 .

Course Summary (1) You should now be able to: Identify how AFS supports standards and business practices in the apparel and footwear industry Outline how AFS functionality integrates the supply chain for the apparel and footwear industry Define and create multi-dimensional product grids and include them in the material master Explain the relationship between requirement and stock categories within a coverage strategy Outline the procurement process in AFS © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 10-3 .

Course Summary (2) You should now be able to: Outline inventory management procedures Describe AFS special business processes and stocks Describe product forecasting and planned independent requirements for AFS Outline Materials Requirements Planning (MRP) procedures and execute AFS MRP for purchased and produced material © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 10-4 .

Course Summary (3) You should now be able to: Evaluate MRP results in AFS Create PP master data for AFS materials Create and release a production order in AFS Explain the ATP check in AFS production orders Analyze different information systems/reports in production © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 10-5 .

Read the Implementation Guide (IMG). © SAP AG 2008 © SAP AG ICP320 10-6 .Recommended Follow-Up Activities Go through the exercises using IDES data or your own data. Read Release Notes. Read the online documentation.

The AFS first level contract is already created in an early planning phase. You can create additional value contracts and quantity contracts with reference to an AFS first level contract at a later time.2.2 (CO-PC) A material-based cost that you can enter manually in the form of a unit cost estimate and then add to an automatic cost estimate with quantity structure.5 0.2. It contains information on the total quantity of materials in a material group. monitoring and maintaining all those processes involved in data procurement and processing within the Business Information Warehouse. AFS First-Level Contract Materials Management 0. which you want to obtain from a vendor within a certain time period. 0.6 0. Change reason codes are defined plant-specifically and are based on SAP quality management. With the action rule you specify whether stock.2. should remain reserved for that order or should be released. which has been allocated to an order whose release check has failed. Additive Cost Product Cost Controlling 0.2. which controls how the system handles allocated stock if the release check fails.3 Administrator Workbench SAP Business Information Warehouse (BW) Tool for controlling. © SAP AG ICP320 11-1 .2. AFS Filter (IS-AFS-PP) Function in the AFS MRP list and AFS stock/requirements list to limit the display of SKU data for a particular AFS material.Appendices 0 Action Rule (IS-AFS-ARun) Rule.2.7 (IS-AFS-MM) The basis for a multi-level contract in purchasing. AFS Component Selection (IS-AFS) You can set in the BOM whether a dependent requirement is to be used for categories of header materials. which contain detailed information at material level or SKU level.4 AFS Change Reason Code (IS-AFS-MM) Code which provides information about why the vendor in a purchase requisition was changed manually. 0.

due to the credit check). purchase orders and the source allocation are checked against quotas. but does not update the orders. There are three allocation run modes: In the normal mode an order is updated if it has been released.2. The simulation mode performs just like the normal mode. the requirement quantities of purchase requisitions.0.2.MM) Reason for not assigning a vendor during the source allocation run. 0. This provides the system with information as to why requirements could not be allocated (for example. This can possibly lead to a restriction of the vendor selection. 0. AFS reasons for not assigned sources Materials Management 0. the transactions and check reports are grouped according to usage areas. The stock is then assigned to this order and can be delivered in the next step. With this mode you can simulate and test results. which occurs if a release check has failed. This mode is used to test possible future scenarios and functions as an early warning system. ICP320 11-2 0.2.2.12 (IS-AFS.10 Control (IS-AFS-PP) AFS MRP list and AFS stock/requirements list function to minimize the display of grid values and categories. The actual stock/requirements situation is not updated. Allocation Mode (IS-AFS-ARUN) Determines how the selected allocation run type proceeds.9 AFS MRP Cockpit (IS-AFS-PP-MRP) Initial screen.8 AFS MM Route Determination Materials Management (IS-AFS-MM) AFS function for determining the move time from a vendor to the receiving plant depending on the route and various shipping conditions. These assignments are saved in a separate database. The assignment of quota is material-specific. That means that requirements are not assigned to certain stock.14 © SAP AG .2. which enables you to directly call specific transactions for a specific material from the overview.2. If the quota check is activated.2. which provides an overview of MRP-relevant transactions and check reports in AFS. This provides a better overview and increases the performance of the AFS evaluation lists. 0.11 AFS Quota (IS-AFS-MM) Definition of a restriction of the import of certain products from a third country. AFS MRP list compression Production Planning and 0. In the AFS MRP Cockpit. The preview mode makes a fictitious assignment of existing requirements to future stock.13 Allocation Event (IS-AFS-ARUN) Event.

2. Backflush Inventory Management 0.2. this percentage scrap is considered for all components contained in the assembly.17 Assembly Scrap Production Planning and Control (PP) A percentage of the quantity of an assembly that does not meet the required production quality. in which at least one component material contains a material grid. but rather by their individual components. The allocation status is determined depending on the allocation event and the final action for open and allocated quantities.19 Average Ratio Basic Data (IS-AFS-BD) Ratio in presizing of one dimension value/period part/category against all other dimensions. Each allocation run is controlled by an allocation run type. It not only provides the user with information on the current status of an allocation. © SAP AG ICP320 11-3 . They have no sales price. The price results from the sum of the individual component prices. In material requirements planning (MRP).20 (MM-IM) The non-manual posting of an issue of components some time after their physical withdrawal for an order.2.2. inventory management.2. it is possible to offer complete combinations with a previously defined quantity ratio. The processing of the assortment (pricing. You enter the assembly scrap percentage in the material master from the MRP view.2.18 Assortment Sales and Distribution (IS-AFS-SD) Description in AFS for sales and distribution BOMs. The goods issue posting for backflushed components is performed automatically at the time of order completion confirmation. The only components excluded from this calculation are those for which the net operation scrap indicator is set. In addition.0. and delivery processing) takes place at component level. 0. 0. You can define several allocation run types in Customizing that have different rules according to the respective business circumstances. The assortment is used as input help in the sales order.16 (IS-AFS-ARUN) A grouping of all the rules that influence the allocation run.15 Allocation Status (IS-AFS-ARUN) Status. which provides information regarding the result of a stock allocation. Assortments are not planned as one unit. 0. but also serves as a selection criterion in the Management Tool and within Reorganization a basis for determining the ARun-specific MRP status ARun Type Allocation Run 0.

The list contains the object number of each component. but also which requirements should be covered by which stock categories. BAPIs offer an object-oriented view of business components in the SAP System. Category structures. They are implemented and stored as RFC-enabled function modules in the Function Builder of the ABAP Workbench. 0. you not only determine the valid stock and requirements categories for the corresponding materials. You can create the following BOM categories in the SAP System: • • • • • 0. You define Business Application Programming Interfaces (BAPIs) in the Business Object Repository (BOR) as methods of SAP business objects or SAP interface types. The definition of categories therefore always influences the MRP. © SAP AG ICP320 11-4 .2.0. 0. The components are known as BOM items. for example. stock and requirements categories and their values are defined in Customizing and are combined plant-specifically into coverage strategies. structured list of the components that make up a product or assembly.21 BAPI (Business Application Programming Interface) Service BAPIs (BC-MID-API) A standardized programming interface that facilitates external access to business processes and data in the SAP System.24 Category (IS-AFS-BD) Characteristic of an AFS material which allows a division of this material into different qualities or countries of origin.2. and unit of measure.23 Material BOM Document structure Equipment BOM Functional location BOM Sales order BOM Production Planning and Bundle Control (IS-AFS-PP) Apparel industry term for all pattern pieces in a marker that will be sewn together to form a garment in a certain size.2.2.22 Bill of Material Production Planning and Control (PP) A complete. multiplied by the number of fabric plies in a stack. the quantity. The information on bundles is maintained in the planned orders and production orders in the AFS solution. By assigning coverage strategies to AFS materials.

2. This type of costing run is based on a user-defined name and a date. In Product Cost Planning. costing runs are used to cost materials with actual data.30 Cost Rollup Product Cost Controlling (CO-PC) A process in material costing in which costs at lower production levels are allocated to the highest level.2. Costs are rolled up by cost component. © SAP AG ICP320 11-5 .29 (CO-PC) A tool that provides the opportunity to cost multiple materials at the same time. For example.2. 0. Conditions include: • • • • 0.25 Compress Production Planning and Control (IS-AFS-PP) AFS MRP list function to hide certain characteristics of MRP elements. Any costs assigned to cost components that are not rolled up are not included in cost estimates of higher costing levels. In Actual Costing/Material Ledger.2. assuring that the origin of the costs remains visible after rollup. 0.2. Costing Run Product Cost Controlling 0. This type of costing run is based on a costing run profile and a period.26 Condition Record Sales and Distribution (SD) A data record that stores a condition or condition supplements.27 Prices Discounts and surcharges Taxes Output Production Planning and Consumption Priority Control (IS-AFS-PP) Indicator in AFS MRP which determines whether the system chooses stock by category or consumption mode and in which order.28 Conversion Indicator Basic Data (IS-AFS-BD) Indicator in AFS Basic data used to define conversion of grid values in the AFS MRP list and AFS Stock/Requirements list.2. 0. costing runs are used to cost materials based on planning data.0. labor costs in preassembly are rolled up into the cost of goods manufactured of the end product as internal labor costs rather than material costs.

2. 0. Coverage strategies are defined in Customizing plant-specifically and dependent on the category structure and are then assigned to individual AFS materials in the material master.0.from market segmentation. Coverage Strategy Basic Data (IS-AFS-BD) A strategy that contains all stock and requirement category values valid for certain materials.2. 0.2.32 Cost of goods manufactured Sales overhead Special direct cost of sales Administration overhead Country Group (IS-AFS-MM) Grouping of countries for which the political restrictions or AFS quota are equally valid (e. Internet Sales and Service and the Customer Interaction Center.g. the coverage strategies have a controlling influence on the MRP.2.2.35 Customer Relationship Management (CRM) Supports all processes involving direct customer contact throughout the entire customer relationship life cycle . Cross-Docking Sales and Distribution 0. The cost of goods sold consists of the following costs: • • • • 0. Since you specify in coverage strategies which requirements should be covered by which requirement categories. The goods are brought from goods receipt directly to goods issue without being put away. © SAP AG ICP320 11-6 . Includes business scenarios such as field sales and service.36 Customer Restriction Sales and Distribution (IS-AFS-SD) Purchasing restrictions for a source material for a certain customer at a certain country or vendor.31 Cost of Goods Sold Product Cost Controlling (CO-PC) A sum of the costs incurred through the value-added process.33 0.2.34 (IS-AFS-SD) Method of processing merchandise in a distribution center. sales lead generation and opportunities to post-sales and customer service. EU). Cross-docking does not involve shipping units being repacked between being received and issued from the distribution center. The grouping of countries facilitates the entry and processing of country-specific restrictions and AFS quota.

2. The result of demand management is the demand program. then all items will be assigned to the same delivery group. If the produced quantities match the quantities planned prior to this in SNP planning.42 Deployment Supply Network Planning (SNP) (APO-SNP) This planning process determines which demands can be fulfilled by the existing supply.38 Inventory Management (MM-IM) An indicator denoting a closed purchase order item for which no more goods receipts are expected. An item that is confirmed for several delivery dates can be confirmed for a single delivery date if it is assigned to a delivery group. 0. and forecast. Demand management can be done manually or based on previous planning results such as sales planning.41 Dependent Requirements Material Requirements Planning (PP-MRP) The planned material requirements that are caused by the production of higherlevel assemblies. the result of the deployment is a confirmation of the SNP plan.2. SOP.2. All items that are assigned to the same delivery group are confirmed for a single delivery date. dependent requirements are automatically created for the components that are necessary for the production of a planned order. the system makes appropriate changes.0. If the sales order is marked in the header for complete delivery. 0. Demand Management Production Planning 0. This is the latest delivery date of all these items.2. This is the latest delivery date of all the confirmation schedule lines of this item.39 Delivery Group Sales and Distribution (SD) The manual or automatic grouping of one or more items (main items and/or subitems) in a sales order so that they can be delivered on the same date. 0.2.40 (PP-MP) The planning of requirement quantities and requirement dates for finished products and important assemblies. © SAP AG ICP320 11-7 . Deployment generates deployment stock transfers that serve as a basis for Transport Load Builder planning. or if these quantities exceed the demand.37 Deallocate To reverse or undo allocations. Delivery Completed Indicator (IS-AFS-ARun) 0.2. In the MRP procedure. after production is complete. If the available quantities are not sufficient to fulfill the demand. and definition of the strategy for planning and producing or procuring a finished product.

2.0. For example. 0. The setting of the dynamic credit check in the allocation run is optional.43 Deviation Quantity Production Planning and Control (IS-AFS-PP) Quantity of a particular grid value in a BOM which differs from the default quantity at material level. but also whether the sold-to party's ordered material is still within the permitted credit limit. An AFS grid is composed of up to three dimensions.2.44 Dimension Basic Data (IS-AFS-BD) A freely definable element of an AFS grid. the dimension value BLUE can be displayed as MODR in purchase orders for a Czech vendor. and periods. grid values.48 (IS-AFS-SD) You can use this in a multi-store order II to influence how existing stocks should be distributed to single stores in the event of a stock shortage.2. requirements categories. or width. Dimension Value Conversion Basic Data (IS-AFS-BD) AFS function with which dimension values can be displayed differently in grids. 0. and as BLAU for a German speaking customer. Distribution Rule Sales and Distribution 0.49 Dynamic Credit Check Allocation Run (IS-AFS-ARUN) A special check procedure during the allocation run. or customers. 0. for example. © SAP AG ICP320 11-8 . Each dimension is composed of dimension values which are all valid entries for a particular dimension. Dimensions are.46 Control (PP) A material is replaced by another one for a certain period. for example. Discontinuation Production Planning and 0.2. Discontinuation of a material causes the dependent requirements for the material to be rerouted for a certain period to another material. be displayed in documents and reports in different languages. Dimension values can. depending on users.2. Distribution profiles can be created manually or via mapping for plants.47 Distribution Profile Basic Data (IS-AFS-BD) Profile which specifies the ratio in which material quantities should be distributed when using the presizing function. length. The system not only checks for existing stocks.2. color. materials.45 0. The distribution is possible according to the first in first out principle or the equal distribution principle. If this is not the case.2. no stock assignment occurs in the allocation run. size. vendors.

0. If there is not enough stock to fulfill all the requirements of all customers.53 (IS-AFS-ARUN) The principle used in the allocation run of assigning existing stocks to requirements. As long as you have not specified your own sort sequence. That way you make sure that the stock that has already been allocated to this requirement remains reserved and will not be available for the coverage of other requirements. FIFO (first in first out) Allocation Run 0. the assignment of the stocks takes place corresponding to the time sequence in which the requirements occurred. Extractor SAP Business Information Warehouse Extractors (BC-BW) Program used to fill the extraction structure of a DataSource with data from datasets in the SAP source system. © SAP AG ICP320 11-9 .2.51 0.54 Fill-Up (IS-AFS-ARUN) Logic. Example You can create the elementary field color and assign it to either the category structure field color or the dimension color. the system first fulfills the requirements of orders that were placed at the beginning of the allocation time period.2.50 Elementary Field (IS-AFS) A field which is composed of one or more category structure fields or dimension values and which can be assigned to values in an external information system such as LIS or BW.2. Using the reallocation. The factory status is stored in the vendor master record and valuates the relation between you and your vendor. whose release check has failed.52 Factory Status (IS-AFS-MM) Criterion for the vendor ranking of the source allocation. open requirements can be continually allocated stock until the valid release rules are fulfilled and the order can be released for delivery. The elementary fields make up all of the desired fields you want to exchange with external systems. which enables the successive allocation of free stock to open requirements. 0.2. 0. This strategy makes it possible to reserve successful stock allocations for orders.2.

Final Determination (IS-AFS-MM) The final point in time that SKU values and quantity entries can be subsequently changed in purchase orders.60 General Ledger Financial Accounting (FI) A ledger designed to present the values used in creating financial statements.2. The specification of the final destination should be made shortly before the material is packed and provided for shipping.2.55 Final Action (IS-AFS-ARUN) Procedure defined in the release rule. if necessary.59 0.2. manual release required) whether and under which circumstances open quantities in orders should be deleted or should remain open until sufficient stock is available 0. For AFS discontinuation.57 0.0. Final Release Check (IS-AFS-ARun) Action. When you define the final action. which determines how the open and allocated requirements quantities are handled at the end of an allocation run.58 0. Follow-Up Material (IS-AFS-PP-MRP) Material. To guarantee the greatest flexibility. which replaces a discontinued material. which checks the allocation result and corrects it. the follow-up material must correspond to the discontinued material in the following ways: • • • • same base quantity same grid same coverage strategy same MRP category 0. In discontinuation. © SAP AG ICP320 11-10 .2. you control • • the reservation status for allocated quantities (for example. the requirements planning diverts the requirement for the discontinued material to the follow-up material after the stock has been completely used up. the receiving plant can be subsequently entered and changed in purchase orders for AFS materials.56 Final Destination (IS-AFS-MM) The time at which you bindingly inform your vendor of the plant to which an ordered material should be delivered.2. It records values at company code level. A final release check always takes place if the sorting used in an allocation run does not correspond to the sorting recommended by SAP AG.2.

Quantities in sales and production orders. For example for the material shirts you could specify a grid value white (dimension: color).2. in procurement and sales are entered at grid value level for AFS materials.2. 40 (dimension: collar size).61 Global Release Rule (IS-AFS-ARun) Comprehensively defined rule.69 © SAP AG ICP320 11-11 .64 0. 0. which determines which checks should run during an allocation before stock is released for delivery. The global release rule is valid for all requirements that have been selected in an allocation run and for which no order-specific or customer-specific release rules have been stored.0. Grid History (IS-AFS-BD) Function in grid maintenance to log which changes where made to grid values and when. procurement and sale of AFS materials at SKU level.2. Grid Report (IS-AFS-BD) Report function of AFS grid maintenance to display all materials using a certain grid. length). Grid Value (IS-AFS-BD) Combination consisting of up to three dimension values in one grid.2.67 0.65 0. size. 52 (dimension: size).2. Grid Entry Basic Data (IS-AFS-BD) Function in AFS to enter quantities in a grid instead of line-by-line.2. This data can be used to define and control presizing and other AFS functions and prices and other conditions. Grid Control Data (IS-AFS-BD) Optional additional data to store data per grid value in MM and SD.68 0. Grid (IS-AFS-BD) Important element of the AFS basic data that maps the characteristic values of an AFS material in grid values and permits combinations consisting of up to three dimensions (for example color.2. all sales or purchasing grids for a master grid or the grid history for a material grid.62 0.66 0. Grid Value Assignment (IS-AFS-BD) BOM maintenance function to assign component-level grid value to header-level grid level automatically if the same grid is used. Grid Dimension Sorting (IS-AFS-PP) Function in AFS Basic data to sort dimension values alphabetically.2. purchase and sales grids facilitate the valuation.63 0. The use of master.2.

2. to the requirements of a customer depending on the sales document type.73 0. according to which requirements should be grouped (for instance.72 0. sales area. sales document type. In the determination rule.0. sales area). which allows different requirements to be allocated according to different rules to the same customer.2.2. This makes it possible. the grouping rules are assigned to a grouping strategy. You use grouping rules to specify the fields.70 Grid Value Group (IS-AFS-MM) Synonym of Price Group Combination of grid values that are procured at the same price (MM) or sold at the same price (SD). customer-specific grouping rules can be defined in a grouping strategy.76 © SAP AG ICP320 11-12 . Heart Grid Value Description for the grid values of a material which you sell or purchase very frequently.2.75 0.74 0. In the grouping rule fields are defined.2. according to which the grouping of the requirements takes place during an allocation run. for instance. Heart Size – invalid synonym of Heart Grid Value Include Function invalid synonym of AFS Component Selection 0. Grouping Rule (IS-AFS-ARun) Rule. which differs from the rule in the allocation type. The grouping strategy is stored in the customer master. you can flag these grid values as heart grid values.2. Grid Value Sorting (IS-AFS-BD) Display function in AFS MRP list to sort procurement proposals and requirements according to certain criteria.71 0.2. The grouping rule is stored in the allocation type. sales document type). When maintaining the grid control data for a material. Grouping Strategy (IS-AFS-ARun) Strategy. In addition. which is stored in the customer master and which overrides the grouping rule in the allocation type. to allocate an individual release rule. according to which the grouping of the requirements should occur in an allocation run (for example.

whose transaction data is not managed in the Business Information Warehouse. the data fields of the BasicCube fact table cannot contain any character fields as key figures.. © SAP AG ICP320 11-13 .80 Line Entry Basic Data (IS-AFS-BD) Default display type of SKUs where the system displays all values in line form instead of in a grid form. are known as InfoCubes.79 InfoSource Warehouse Management (BW-WHM) An InfoSource describes a quantity of all available data for a business event. key figures.) are called InfoObjects in BW. InfoSources can either contain transaction data or master data (attributes. 0. units. This dataset can be evaluated with the BEx query. A RemoteCube. An InfoCube describes a self-contained dataset (from the reporting view). or A MultiCube that presents a view on data from several BasicCubes or RemoteCubes.78 InfoObject SAP Business Information Warehouse (BW) Business reporting objects (customers.2. Financial Accounting). request number). sales. and hierarchies).2. An InfoSource is a quantity of information that has been grouped together and can be said to belong together logically from a business point of view.. Unlike the ODS object. you might be dealing with • • • A BasicCube. An InfoSource is always a quantity of InfoObjects that can be said to belong together logically.77 InfoCube Warehouse Management (BW-WHM) The central objects.. Character fields are thus interpreted as keys. and technical characteristics (for example. Cost Center Accounting). 0. on which reports and analyses are based in BW. for example. time characteristics.2. With an InfoCube. An InfoSource always refers to one scenario from an application (for example. that shows a quantity of relational tables in the star schema. for a business-orientated area. They are categorized as characteristics. 0. or type of business event (for example. texts.0.2.

2.83 Static Period Optimum Management Tool (IS-AFS-ARUN) Using the management tool. In the SAP APO (Advanced Planner and Optimizer). • • • • • • • 0. which can be configured in the location product master. Groff lot-sizing procedure Reorder point planning Material Requirements Lot-Sizing Procedure Planning (PP-MRP) A procedure in material requirements planning used to calculate order and production quantities (lot sizes).g. This therefore allows you to go back and manually correct the allocation run results.85 © SAP AG .82 Exact lot size Fixed lot size Period lot size Reorder point procedure For further lot-sizing procedures there are special heuristics available.0. the following standard lotsizing procedures are available. Lot-sizing procedures are divided into the following groups: • • • 0.81 Lot-Sizing Procedure Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling (APO-PPS) Procedure in production planning that is used to calculate the purchase order quantities of receipts. Mapping IDoc interface (BC-SRVEDI) The pattern according to which the data elements of an EDI message type are assigned to the fields of the IDoc type.2. e.2. Map Basic Data (IS-AFS-BD) Process of calculating the relationship between SKUs from historical sales data to create distribution profiles which can be used by presizing.2.84 0.2. Mapping a material helps to create as accurate of a distribution profile as possible. you can manually change or delete the results of the allocation run. ICP320 11-14 0.

Mass Data Change (IS-AFS) Tool for changing fields of several master data records at once.91 0. MRP Module (IS-AFS-PP) Key in the stock category allocation table of the MRP to assign different AFS MRP logics to the coverage strategies.89 0.2.2. Production Planning and Control (IS-AFS-PP) 0.2.86 Marker Number for marker used in production order. Master grids are defined across plants.2.90 0.94 Material Requirements Planning (PP-MRP) A term for the actions of creating a production plan or procurement plan for the materials in a plant or company. Mass Document Change (IS-AFS) A special report for quickly changing a large amount of sales documents at once (sales orders.88 0.0.2.92 0.2. Using master grids you specify the specific value and the combination possibilities of dimension values. 0. contracts).93 Planning (PP-MRP) The parts or products. produced and sold in your company.2. in master production scheduling.2. produced and sold in your company.2. Using master grids you specify the specific value and the combination possibilities of dimension values.87 Master Grid Basic Data (IS-AFS-BD) Total of all characteristic values in which an AFS material can be purchased. MPS (Master Production Scheduling) Material Requirements 0. Material ID Basic Data (IS-AFS-BD) ID set in AFS Basic data view of material master to assign a grid value conversion type to an AFS material. Master grids are defined across plants. © SAP AG ICP320 11-15 . Master schedule items are marked with the MRP procedure for master production scheduling. Master Grid (IS-AFS-BD) Total of all characteristic values in which an AFS material can be purchased. that influence company profits or that take up critical resources are planned.

2. further value and quantity contracts can be created at a later time.101 © SAP AG ICP320 11-16 . which could not be allocated stock due to the current stock situation.2.2. which contain detailed information at material level or SKU level. The delivery of the goods can thus occur directly or the goods can be flagged to be sent to a distribution center for further delivery to the stores. Negative Stock Inventory Management 0.2. Multi-Store Order (MSO) (IS-AFS-SD) An order type in which the sold-to party orders for any number of stores as ship-to party.0. whose delivery dates fall within this date interval and who match the selection criteria.95 Minimum Quota (IS-AFS-ARun) Quota.97 0. Open Quantity (IS-AFS-ARun) Order quantity. A different minimum quota can be defined for each release level (total order. dimension level). the stock figure can be temporarily negative. Only those requirements. the system independently calculates the open-todelivery window for each allocation run.96 0. 0. According to your settings.2. item level. will be included in the allocation run. 0. In order to block capacities at a vendor early on. Multi-Level Contract (IS-AFS-MM) A structure in purchasing with several interdependent contracts based on an AFS contract. Open-to-Delivery (IS-AFS-ARun) Time frame. If a material withdrawal is posted before posting the receipts. an AFS contract for diverse materials of one material group is created in an early planning phase.100 0.2. but the relevant goods receipts have not been made. on which the allocation of requirements and stock during an allocation run is based.98 (MM-IM) A provisional stock situation that occurs if a material is available in stock.2.99 No-Grid Material Basic Data (IS-AFS-BD) An AFS material containing batches with AFS grid information about AFS components but without a grid. which specifies the minimum percentage of the order quantity required to release the corresponding stock for delivery. With reference to this AFS contract.

2. The vendor capacity forms a decisive criterion as the total of the total capacity and overload capacity for the assignment of the fixed vendor in the source allocation. Overload capacities are specified periodically and used after the consumption of the total capacity for the procurement of materials. The price will be active when the AFS price activation has been executed. 0. which the vendor is willing to perform for you in special cases.2. Overload Capacity (IS-AFS-MM) Part of the vendor capacity.0.106 0. It is not based on sales orders.102 Overhead Costing Controlling (CO) The most common method of costing cost objects in Cost Object Controlling (COPC-OBJ). • © SAP AG ICP320 11-17 .105 Planned Independent Requirement Material Requirements Planning (PP-MRP) A planned requirement quantity for a finished product in a period of time. 0. In addition to the total capacity. The quantity structure will be determined on basis of the grid dimension and category of this SKU. This method first assigns the direct costs from Cost Element Accounting (CO-OMCEL) to the cost object.2.2. Materials without quantity structure a price can be maintained for each Preference SKU. Prorated overhead costs are then applied to the cost object in proportion to the direct costs.2. expressed as a percentage.103 0.107 Price Group see Grid Value Group Production Planning and Preference SKU Control (IS-AFS-PP) SKU whose price is representative for SKUs assigned to the same preference group Use • Materials with quantity structure while a SKU Costing run one cost estimate will be created for each Preference SKU.2. Pegged Requirement Material Requirements 0. you agree on an overload capacity with every vendor. in the evaluations for material requirements planning.104 Planning (PP-MRP) The pegged requirement shows the order from the next higher level of the bill of material that is the source of the requirement in a lower level.

2. Example: You specify in a distribution profile that quantities of the material "Men's T-shirts" should be distributed as follows: • • • 30 percent to sizes L and XL each 20 percent to size XXL 10 percent to sizes M and S each. requirement categories. However. A product group can be single-level or multi-level.111 Control (PP) A moveable operating resource used in production or plant maintenance. Production Resource Tool Production Planning and 0. periodic unit price 0. © SAP AG ICP320 11-18 .General (LO) A collection of materials defined by user criteria.108 Presizing Basic Data (IS-AFS-BD) An AFS function which helps in the distribution of requirement and procurement quantities of AFS materials to certain plants.2. for example. These can be products. With the aid of purchase grids you specify which of the grid values you defined in the master grid for an AFS material are permitted in purchasing.2. Product groups are multi-level if they include products from other product groups. or.109 Price Control Materials Management (MM) An indicator determining the procedure used for material valuation. 0.2.2. if the material ledger has been activated.110 Product Group Logistics .112 Purchase Grid Materials Management (IS-AFS-MM) A subset of a master grid. The following procedures are available in the standard system: • • Valuation at standard price Valuation at moving average price or. or periods. they may be finished products produced on the same machine when there is a bottle-neck. the lowest product group in the hierarchy must contain materials. You specify in a distribution profile the proportion in which the material quantities should be distributed and assign the distribution profile to the corresponding materials. the system will distribute the material quantity in accordance with the distribution profile to the grid values. 0.0. If you then create a purchase order for 100 pieces. enter the corresponding grid values and use the presizing function. from a similar product group. grid values. Purchase grids are always uniquely derived from a master grid and contain its grid values at most.

0. in which you select InfoObjects or reusable structures for an InfoProvider and specify the view of the data (query view) by distributing them to filters.115 Query Business Explorer (BW-BEX) Collection of a selection of characteristics and key figures (InfoObjects) for the analysis of the data of an InfoProvider. and free characteristics. which determines whether allocations from previous allocation runs should be included in the current allocation run.2. item level. Release Rule (IS-AFS-ARUN) Rule. in BEx Web applications. The reallocation rule is the basis for a successive allocation of stock to orders with open requirements.2.114 (IS-AFS-MM) AFS function to combine purchase requisitions during the assignment of vendors to purchase requisitions in the source allocation run. 0. You used this saved query view as a basis for data analysis and reporting in the BEx Analyzer. The release rule specifies for example the following: • The minimum and maximum percentages of the order quantity which must / should be allocatable at the various release levels (total order. groups and orders. You define a query in the BEx Query Designer.2.2. whereas you can define as many queries as you like for each InfoProvider. or in formatted reporting.2. as an error or warning).117 • © SAP AG ICP320 11-19 . A query always refers exactly to one InfoProvider. which determines which checks should be run during an allocation before allocated stock is released for delivery. Purchase Requisition Combination Materials Management 0. 0. columns. Whether a credit check should take place at the various release levels and how the system issues the result of this check (for instance.113 Purchasing Info Record (MM-PUR) A source of information for the procurement of a certain material from a certain vendor. according to the fill-up logic. in BEx Mobile Intelligence.116 Reallocation Rule (IS-AFS-ARUN) Rule. dimension level) before the corresponding stock is released for delivery. Release rules can be globally defined or defined specifically for individual customers.0. rows.

Since the reorganization can be started using a background job. the replenishment lead time is determined to cover all BOM levels. or a complete external purchasing document must be released (that is. The grouping is the prerequisite for using the different allocation logics of the allocation run.118 Release Strategy Purchasing (MM-PUR) A plan defining the release codes with which a purchase requisition item. 0. The requirement number is the originating document. large data quantities can be processed outside of the normal office hours. This way you can react to a changed stock/requirements situation at any time after an ARun. Sales orders with identical data form an allocation group. Reorganization Allocation Run 0. You must determine which individual fields are relevant for forming the groups. © SAP AG ICP320 11-20 . The requirement type refers to the origin type. In in-house production. for example. approved) and the sequence in which release is to be effected using these codes. 0. you can establish a release strategy for all purchase requisitions with a value in excess of a certain figure.122 Requirements Category Logistics Execution (LE) The goods transfers and stock quantities in the Warehouse Management system contain a reference to their origin. Requirements Grouping Allocation Run 0.2.122 (IS-AFS-ARUN) Sales orders can be grouped together in an allocation run. the purchase order number or the cost center. For example.02. Individual groups can then be processed differently. for example. 0.120 Replenishment Lead Time Material Requirements Planning (PP-MRP) The total time for the in-house production or for the external procurement of a product.119 (IS-AFS-ARUN) The reorganization enables you to change or undo the results of the allocation run. goods receipt for purchase order or goods issue to cost centers. unlike the allocation run type. a complete purchase requisition.2.2.2.2.123 Requirements Selection Allocation Run (IS-AFS-ARUN) The requirements selection controls which requirements are considered by the allocation run.

Example: Customers that have a high delivery priority should always be supplied before customers with a normal or low delivery priority. Rounding (IS-AFS-MM) This allows you to round quantity entries in purchasing documents on the basis of rounding factors and a rounding method. Availability is checked again and a new date is created if necessary.128 Control (PP) A description of the production process used to manufacture plant materials or provide services in the production industry. Routing Production Planning and 0.127 0. 0. entry date and delivery date can be relevant for the check.2. The sorting is based on requirements and schedule lines.125 Rescheduling Sales and Distribution (SD) An automatic processing of backorders. The "rescheduling" program processes sales document items contained in the item directory for the material.126 0.2. whether the quantities should be rounded up or down. You can analyze the last rescheduling run using the evaluation report for a rescheduling run. You can prioritize orders according to certain criteria.2. With the help of the rounding method you specify. among other things. That means you can determine which orders should be allocated first.124 Requirements Sorting Allocation Run (IS-AFS-ARUN) You can define a separate sequence for the allocation process that overrides the original sequence in which the orders were received.2. Request for Quotation Purchasing (MM-PUR) A request from a purchasing organization to a vendor (external supplier) to submit a quotation for the supply of materials or the performance of services.2. Open items and schedule lines for stock transfer orders.129 Sales Grid Sales and Distribution (IS-AFS-SD) A subset of a master grid that contains the grid value variants of a material for use in sales. Rounding factors can be defined for every SKU and make the rounding of SKU quantities possible to a multiple of the rounding factor. 0. and purchase requisitions (items only) are considered for the selected materials.2. The criteria delivery priority.0. scheduling agreements. © SAP AG ICP320 11-21 .

130 Season Processing (IS-AFS-SD) A parallel or overlapping processing in the apparel and footwear industry of various collections (for various seasons or lines).132 SKU (Stock Keeping Unit) Basic Data (IS-AFS-BD) A detailed schedule line of an AFS material. Several different requirements selections can be combined into one selection set. however.0. Requirements outside of the SKU horizon are planned only at material level. AFS materials can be mapped in various grid values (e. quality A/country of origin D). Planning at material level and at SKU level in the SKU horizon is carried out separately. Selection Set Allocation Run 0.g.2.134 SKU Level Horizon Production Planning and Control (IS-AFS-PP) Period in which the AFS MRP carries out planning at SKU level.153 SKU Level Horizon Method 1 Production Planning and Control (IS-AFS-PP) MRP search method where MRP only uses stock at material level beyond the SKU level horizon to satisfy requirements within the SKU level horizon at SKU level. That means that requirements at material level cannot be satisfied by procurement at SKU level. a grid value or the AFS material in a category form a valid stock keeping unit.2.2.133 Control (IS-AFS-PP) Technique in some AFS MRP lot-sizing procedures which uses SKU groups to determine lot sizes. the stock keeping units correspond to the possible combinations of grid and category values.g. This enables you to include several allocation runs in one background job.131 (IS-AFS-ARUN) Prerequisite for processing allocation runs using the background processing. 0. SKU group procedure Production Planning and 0. This process involves very large data quantities that belong to different seasons. If a master grid and a coverage strategy are assigned to an AFS material. be managed at the same time and assigned to the corresponding seasons. 38/yellow) and category values (e. 0. They must.2. As long as AFS materials are only mapped in grid values or only in categories.2. 0. © SAP AG ICP320 11-22 .2.

including customer orders. Production Planning and Control (IS-AFS-PP) Controls AFS discontinued materials at SKU level. 0. warehouse handling capacity and calendars. As an integral part of the overall supply network planning solution.2.136 SKU Level Horizon Method 2 Production Planning and Control (IS-AFS-PP) MRP search method which allows MRP to allocate stock at SKU level which is beyond the SKU level horizon to requirements before the horizon at SKU level.2. The primary purpose of the Transport Load Builder (TLB) is to use the single product transport recommendations calculated by Deployment to create multiproduct loads while ensuring vehicles are filled to maximum capacity. and purchasing plans. APO's Deployment solution enables planners to dynamically rebalance and optimize the distribution network at execution time. production plans.139 SNP (Supply Network Planning) (APO-SNP) A module in the Advanced Planner and Optimizer (APO) that enables organizations to determine sourcing.137 SKU quantity adjustment Production Planning and Control (IS-AFS-PP) Function to copy marker or bundle quantities at SKU level to overwrite SKU quantities in AFS planned orders and production orders. The Deployment function in SNP determines optimized inbound and outbound distribution of available supply in response to short-term demand. including transportation.0. Deployment logic considers a wide variety of short-term constraints.2. and safety stock requirements.2. distribution plans. 0.138 SKU Status © SAP AG ICP320 11-23 . stock transport requirements. The system draws on the data universally available in liveCache to optimize such plans based on optimization algorithms and heuristic approaches that enable the planner to define rules and inventory policies. 0.

or the capacity situation of the respective vendors. for example. © SAP AG ICP320 11-24 . Flexible planning offers options for customized configuration. Flexible planning is performed on hierarchies containing chosen organizational levels. production.142 0. Split Valuation Invoice Verification (MM-IV) An option that lets you manage stocks of a single material in a plant in different stock accounts in terms of value.143 Spread (IS-AFS-ARUN) Logic. or so that each level is planned separately. Sales & Operations Planning includes: standard SOP and flexible planning.2. Using split valuation. and plant. Resource planning can be performed to determine work center capacities and other resources required to meet targets.141 0. SOP (Sales and Operations Planning) 0.2.2. Others are produced internally. distribution channel. Standard SOP comes preconfigured with the system. material. The component can run in a distributed environment using Application Link Enabling (ALE). or estimated data. import restrictions from a third country. Such stocks can be subject to different price controls.0. such as personal and company preferences. You can valuate different stocks of the same material separately. to all distribution channels. materials. After the optimum vendors have been found. Example Some stocks of a material can be procured externally. which can be used in the case of stock shortage to equally distribute the available stock among the open requirements.140 Production Planning and Control (PP) A forecasting and planning tool for setting targets for sales. sales organization. The system can be configured so that target values set at one organizational level are distributed (aggregated and disaggregated) automatically to all other organizational levels in the hierarchy. Source Allocation (IS-AFS-MM) Analyzing tool that supports the evaluation and selection of the appropriate vendors for your purchase orders for materials. SOP supports high-level planning of complex planning hierarchies and detailed planning of finished products. and other supply chains based on historical. they are written in the purchase requisitions as fixed vendors. Planning in standard SOP is based on product group hierarchies and is performed level by level. and plants in a sales organization. for example. you can assign your "bought-out" stocks and your "made-in" stocks to different accounts and valuate the "bought-out" stocks at different prices to the "made-in" stocks.2. The source allocation uses different selection criteria for this. current. In flexible planning. users can define the content and layout of planning screens. A top-down or a bottom-up approach to planning is possible.

2. which allows you to sort stock according to certain criteria.2. size. manufacturing.2.146 0. Supply Chain Engineer is used for modeling and maintaining the network model.148 Third Dimension (IS-AFS-BD) One of the dimensions in an AFS grid which are displayed differently in grid maintenance. Basic Data (IS-AFS-BD) 0.144 Stock Selection Allocation Run (IS-AFS-ARUN) The stock selection controls which stock is assigned to the existing requirements by the allocation run.147 0. only the corresponding sales order stock should be assigned.0. 0. It acts as a top planning layer through which the user can oversee other planning areas within an enterprise including demand. SCC has three components: • • • Supply Chain Cockpit provides a detailed. stock type or storage location. SCC is a graphical instrument panel for modeling. distribution and transportation. Stock Transport Order Materials Management (MM) A purchase order used to request or instruct a plant to transport material from one plant to another (that is. such as batch number. to effect a long distance physical stock transfer) within the same corporate enterprise. 0. Alert Monitor handles common exceptions and problems for all APO applications. Total Record Range Counts the number of grid history records. The stock transport order allows delivery costs incurred as a result of the stock transfer to be charged to the material transported. navigating and controlling the supply chain.2. whereas the entire available stock is used for a standard order.145 Stock Sorting (IS-AFS-ARUN) Option. Supply Chain Cockpit (SCC) (APO-SCC) One of the planning applications of the Advanced Planner and Optimizer (APO). Different business processes require the use of different stock types.149 © SAP AG ICP320 11-25 . graphical overview of complete chain.2.2. Example: For purchase-to orders.

154 Quality Batch Degree of purity Use or non-use in promotions 0. Example An enterprise manages its stocks of a material using the valuation category "Quality". It displays a selection of fields for an extract structure of the source system. In contrast to the switch layout in Cost Center Accounting.152 Two-Level Rounding (IS-AFS-PP-MRP) Rounding technique.153 Valuation Type Invoice Verification (MM-IV) A subdivision of a valuation category in split valuation. If the cost component layout of the primary cost component split for the cost center activity prices is not the same as the cost component layout of the primary cost component split for the products.2. Valuation Category Invoice Verification (MM-IV) Criterion for the separate valuation of different stocks of a material managed under one material number. Reasons for such so-called "split valuation" include: • • • • 0.151 Transfer Structure Product Cost Controlling (CO-PC) A structure that controls the transfer of costs from the cost components of one cost component layout into the cost components of another cost component layout. the system first rounds the material quantities at SKU level and then rounds at material level. which reassigns cost components within a single cost component layout. the transfer structure can be used to specify how the cost component split of an internal activity or process for a material cost estimate is transferred into the cost component splits of the material being costed. 0.2.150 Transfer Structure Warehouse Management (BW-WHM) The transfer structure is the structure in which the data from the source system is transported into the Business Information Warehouse. which MRP uses during the lot-size calculation. comprising the following valuation types: • • • High quality Average quality Inferior quality © SAP AG ICP320 11-26 . the transfer structure assigns cost components between two different cost component layouts.2.0. 0.2. In two-level rounding.2.

0. Work in Process Product Cost Controlling 0. or of a profit center within the organization.156 VAS (Value-Added Service) (IS-AFS-SD) Services that improve the appearance.158 (CO-PC) The unfinished products whose costs are calculated in one of the following ways: By calculating the difference between the actual costs charged to an order and the actual costs credited to the order By valuating the yield confirmed to date for each milestone or reporting point. attractiveness and processing of a product. the valuation view creates what is called a valuation approach.2.155 Valuation View Controlling (CO) A particular vantage point from which you can valuate your business transactions .157 0. packing. you can define the following views: • • • Legal view Group view Profit center view Together with a currency type and a currency. less the relevant scrap 0.2.2. You can save the workbook in your favorites or in your roles. In the context of multiple valuation and transfer prices.2.that of an individual company. © SAP AG ICP320 11-27 .159 Zero Quantity (IS-AFS-PP) Function in a BOM so that the system does not create any components for a certain SKU. of the group as a whole. for example. 0. Workbook Business Explorer (BW-BEX) A file containing several worksheets (an expression from Microsoft Excel terminology) You insert one or more queries in the workbook in order to be able to display them in the Business Explorer Analyzer. ticketing and special service.2.

© SAP AG ICP320 11-28 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful